Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note front:intro gtn1 0 # Introduction to Romans\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of Romans\n\n1. Introduction (1:1–15)\n2. Main Theme: Righteousness is received by trusting in Jesus Christ (1:16–17)\n3. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20)\n4. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)\n5. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)\n6. God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36)\n7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)\n8. Conclusion (15:14–16:27)\n\n### Who wrote the book of Romans?\n\nThe Apostle Paul wrote the book of Romans and may other books in the New Testament. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was part of a strict Jewish religious group called the Pharisees. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire.\n\n### What is the book of Romans about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to “bring about the obedience of faith” ([16:26](../16/26.md)).\n\nIn this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1–11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12–16),\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Romans.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Rome,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Rome.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What are the titles used to refer to Jesus?\n\nIn Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ (1:1), the Seed of David (1:3), the Son of God (1:4), the Lord Jesus Christ (1:7), Christ Jesus (3:24), Propitiation (3:25), Jesus (3:26), Jesus our Lord (4:24), Lord of Hosts (9:29), a Stumbling Stone and Rock of Offence (9:33), the End of the Law (10:4), the Deliverer (11:26), Lord of the Dead and the Living (14:9), and the Root of Jesse (15:12).\n\n### How should theological terms in Romans be translated?\n\nPaul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four Gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are “justification” (5:1), “works of the law” (3:20), “reconcile” (5:10), “propitiation” (3:25), “sanctification” (6:19), and “the old man” (6:6). If your language doesn’t have similar words, you can develop short phrases to communicate these ideas. For example, the term “gospel” can be translated as “the good news about Jesus Christ.”\n\nTranslators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, “righteousness” sometimes means that a person obeys God’s law. At other times, “righteousness” means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God’s law for us.\n\n### What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel ([11:5](../11/05.md))?\n\nThe idea of a “remnant” is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as “the remnant.”\n\nIn [11:1–9](../11/01.md), Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/remnant]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by being “in Christ”?\n\nThe phrase “in Christ” and similar phrases occur in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1,2,39; 9:1; 12:5,17; 15:17; and 16:3,7,9,10. Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages.\n\nThese phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in [3:24](../03/24.md) (“the redemption that is in Christ Jesus”), Paul referred to our being redeemed “because” of Jesus Christ. In [8:9](../08/09.md) (“you are not in the flesh but in the Spirit”), Paul spoke of believers submitting “to” the Holy Spirit. In [9:1](../09/01.md) (“I tell the truth in Christ”), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that “is in agreement with” Jesus Christ.\n\nNevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use “in.” He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of “in,” such as, “by means of,” “in the manner of,” or “in regard to.” But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that represents the immediate sense and the sense of “in union with.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/inchrist]])\n\n### How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT?\n\nThe scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:\n\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless and faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones” or “holy people.” (See: [1:7](../01/07.md))\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In cases where some other English versions have “saints” or “holy ones,” the ULT uses “believers.” (See: 8:27; 12:13; 15:25, 26, 31; 16:2, 15)\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “consecrated,” or “reserved for.” (See: [15:16](../15/16.md))\n\nThe UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to Paul’s audience. There are only four instances of singular “you,” three of which are quotations from the Old Testament ([9:7](../09/07.md), [17](../09/17.md); [13:4](../13/04.md), [15:9](../15/09.md)). Those exceptions will be addressed in the notes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Romans?\n\nFor the following verses, modern version of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote.\n\n* “he \\[God\\] works all things together for good” ([8:28](../08/28.md)). Some older versions read, “All things work together for good.”\n* “But if it is by grace, it is no longer by works. Otherwise grace would no longer be grace” ([11:6](../11/06.md)). Some older versions read: “But if it is by works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work.”\n\nThe following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the book of Romans.\n\n* “May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all. Amen” ([16:24](../16/24.md)).\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1:intro hn5n 0 # Romans 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Introduction (1:1–15)\n * Greeting (1:1–7)\n * Paul plans to visit Rome (1:8–15)\n2. Main Theme: Righteousness is received by having faith in Jesus Christ (1:16–17)\n3. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20)\n * All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The gospel\n\nThis chapter refers to the contents of the Book of Romans as “the gospel” ([1:2](../rom/01/02.md)). Romans is not a Gospel like Matthew, Mark, Luke, or John, which are historical accounts of the life of Jesus. Instead, chapters 1–8 present the biblical gospel, which is the good news of salvation. The gospel contains the following true ideas: Everyone has sinned. Jesus died for our sins. Jesus came back to life again so that we might live for his glory and receive eternal life when we die.\n\n### Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God\n\nIn this chapter Paul explains that no one has an excuse for sinning. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the eternal punishment of God. The requirement for this punishment was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### “God gave them over”\n\nMany scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God allows men to pursue their own sinful desires, he does not force them to act sinfully. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:1 x3em rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person Παῦλος 1 In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “From Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1:1 plvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Παῦλος 1 **Paul** is the name of a man, an apostle of Jesus. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to Romans. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1:1 e417 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish δοῦλος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, κλητὸς ἀπόστολος 1 These two phrases give further information about Paul. He describes himself as being someone given the position and authority of being Christ’s **servant** and **apostle**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1:1 v5b9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, ἀφωρισμένος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Jesus called to be an apostle and set apart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:1 ukts rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ 1 Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Jesus**set** him **apart**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to preach the gospel of God” or “so that I could announce the good news from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1:1 ji90 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that comes from **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the gospel from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:2 cu3r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ὃ 1 Here, **which** marks that further information is going to be given about “the gospel of God” in the previous verse. Paul is emphasizing that “the gospel of God” has its origin in **the holy Scriptures** that also come from God. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1:3 lab1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish περὶ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 This phrase gives us further information about “the gospel of God.” Paul means that the message of God’s promised good news is about God’s Son, “Christ Jesus” (See [verse 1](../01/01.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel about his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1:3 lk5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 **Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1:3 y2uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῦ γενομένου ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ 1 Here, **from a seed of David** is an idiom meaning “David’s descendant.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who was born a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1:3 rj9f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα 1 Here, **according to the flesh** is an idiom meaning “with reference to physical descent.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “according to natural descent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1:4 nhz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τοῦ ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν δυνάμει κατὰ Πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 In this verse, Paul places these phrases in the order he wants to emphasize. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1:4 at5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῦ ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that **God** did it. Alternate translation: “whom God designated as the Son of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:4 cp80 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ 1 **Son of God** is an important title that describes the relationship between **God** and **Jesus**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1:4 h32u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν δυνάμει 1 Here, **in power** could refer to: (1) the means by which God designated Jesus as the Son of God. Alternate translation: “who was designated the Son of God by means of power” (2) a new level of power God gave to the Son of God. Alternate translation: “who was designated as the powerful Son of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:4 m89w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession Πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe God’s **Spirit** that is characterized by **holiness**. This refers to the Holy Spirit. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an alternate expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:4 js9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “by being resurrected from the dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:4 h97z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom νεκρῶν 1 Here, the phrase translated **of dead ones** refers to dead people. Here it means that Jesus physically died and was buried. If your language has a word or phrase for the place that dead people go, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “from the place where dead people are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1:4 zvql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession νεκρῶν 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe the place from where **Jesus** was resurrected. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the preposition “from” instead of “of.” Alternate translation: “from death” or “from among the dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:4 brej rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our** refers to all Christians, so it is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1:5 ww9a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ οὗ 1 Here, **whom** refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:5 jr9e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δι’ οὗ ἐλάβομεν χάριν καὶ ἀποστολὴν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **apostleship**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he who acted kindly toward us and made us his apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:5 mosg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐλάβομεν 1 Here, **we** is exclusive and your language may require you to mark this form. It could refer to: (1) Paul and other apostles, as in the UST. (2) Paul speaking about himself in a plural form. Alternate translation: “I received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1:5 mv5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς 1 Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Jesus made Paul and other people his apostles. Use a natural way in your language introduce a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1:5 krzj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **obedience** and **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for people to faithfully obey Jesus among all the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:5 cf3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως 1 Here, **obedience of faith** could refer to: (1) obedience that is characterized by trust in God. Alternate translation: “for obedience by trusting in God” or “obedience that comes from trusting in God” (2) obedience that results from trusting in God. Alternate translation: “faith that results in obedience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:5 eem9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 Here, **the Gentiles** could refer to: (1) the nations. Use this interpretation if you interpreted **we** to refer to all the apostles and retained it in your translation. Alternate translation: “among all people groups” (2) non-Jewish people groups. Use this interpretation if you interpreted **we** to refer only to Paul and translated it as “I”. Alternate translation: “among all non-Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:5 rd3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐλάβομεν χάριν καὶ ἀποστολὴν εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “we received grace and apostleship for the sake of his name, for obedience of the faith among all the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1:5 sxc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ 1 Here Paul uses **name** figuratively. It could refer to: (1) Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Jesus” (2) Jesus’ reputation. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Jesus’ fame” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1:6 xurz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν οἷς 1 Here,**whom** refers to “the Gentiles” who were mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated “the Gentiles” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “among the nations” or “among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:6 sks2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 In this letter, with four exceptions, the words **you** and your are plural and refer to the recipients of this letter, who are members of the church at Rome (See [1:7](../01/07.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers in Christ at Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1:6 qq9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession κλητοὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **called ones** who were called by **Jesus Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “ones called by Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:7 z85a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person πᾶσιν τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ῥώμῃ 1 In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then say to whom they were writing, and they would name those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “To all of you who are in Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1:7 ymaj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ῥώμῃ 1 **Rome** is the name of a city, the capital city of the Roman Empire. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1:7 zfwq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the adjective **beloved** as a noun in order to describe the church at Rome. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this words with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are loved of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1:7 rkdh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἀγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **beloved** who are loved by **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “loved by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:7 v8bl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 1:7 ys4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **grace** and **peace** with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show his gracious acts to you and make you feel peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:7 d8pa rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 **Father** here is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus and the relationship between God and believers. Alternate translation: “our Father God and the Lord Jesus, the Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1:7 j61d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive Πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 When Paul writes **our** here, he is speaking of himself and his readers, so **our** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “who is the Father of us Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1:8 yrau rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result πρῶτον μὲν εὐχαριστῶ τῷ Θεῷ μου διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν, ὅτι ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ. 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because your faith is being proclaimed throughout the whole world, I first want to thank my God through Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1:8 totr rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases πρῶτον μὲν 1 **First** here indicates that Paul has finished his introduction to the letter, and what follows is the beginning of the content of the letter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The first thing I want to say is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1:8 tdsj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῷ Θεῷ μου 1 Paul is using the possessive form **my God** to express that he belongs to **God**. Paul does not mean that he owns God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the God I belong to” or “the God that owns me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:8 bphf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way you trust in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:8 efqs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that other believers are proclaiming how great the faith of the Roman believers is. Alternate translation: “other people are proclaiming your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:8 k7qf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ 1 Here, **the whole world** is an exaggeration that refers to all the parts of the world that were familiar to Paul and his readers, particularly the Roman Empire. Paul is not referring to every place on the planet. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “across the known world” or “wherever the Roman Empire is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1:9 c7pa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 **For** indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that he thanks God for the Roman believers. If it would be helpful to you readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You can be sure this is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1:9 twht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure μάρτυς & μού ἐστιν ὁ Θεός, ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὡς ἀδιαλείπτως μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses and make a new sentence if necessary. Alternate translation: “God is my witness how I continually make mention of you. I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1:9 dx6p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish μάρτυς & μού & ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 This phrase gives us further information about **God**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my witness and I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1:9 ll1e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μάρτυς & μού 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **witness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who testifies about me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:9 ydnc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου 1 Here, **spirit** refers to the inner person, which is what a person thinks and feels. Paul means that he serves God with complete devotion. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “with my whole heart” or “wholeheartedly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:9 ih0v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 Here, **in** indicates the means by which Paul served God and **gospel** refers specifically to proclaiming the **gospel**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:9 o66d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **gospel** that is about God’s **Son**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the gospel about his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:9 r2l5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ 1 **Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1:9 f9p2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Here, **continually** is an exaggeration that emphasizes how frequently Paul prayed for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for them. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I regularly” or “I habitually” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole) 1:9 vtuq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι 1 Here, **making mention** is an idiom for prayer. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am … praying for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1:10 mdc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet πάντοτε ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν μου, δεόμενος 1 This phrase means the same thing as “I continually make mention of you” in the previous verse. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how intensely he prays that God will allow him to visit the church at Rome. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase for the similar passage in the previous verse and in this verse provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “in all my prayers, I beg God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1:10 oi0x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντοτε 1 Here, the word **always** is an exaggeration that figuratively express the frequency of Paul’s prayers to God for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for them. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “frequently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1:10 b5wy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῷ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **will**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because God wills for me” or “because God wants me”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:11 ki6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that this is a reason clause. Paul is indicating why he constantly prays to visit the church at Rome in [verses 9–10](../01/09.md). Use a natural way in your language to express the reason for something. Alternate translation: “I am always requesting this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1:11 gjdu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἰδεῖν ὑμᾶς 1 Paul uses **see** figuratively to describe not only seeing the Christians in Rome, but also visiting them and spending time with them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to visit you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1:11 b23b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 Here, **so that** indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why he wants to visit the believers at Rome. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1:12 pnnm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν 1 Here, **and that is** gives us further information about why Paul wants to share “some spiritual gift” with the church at Rome. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “namely” or “specifically” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1:12 ux1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνπαρακληθῆναι ἐν ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to mutually encourage each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:12 ddtm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διὰ τῆς ἐν ἀλλήλοις πίστεως, ὑμῶν τε καὶ ἐμοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to to refer to the trust in Jesus that both he and his readers shared. Paul means that they should mutually encourage each other because they have a mutual faith in Christ. If this is not clear in your language, you can state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “by both you and I sharing with one another how we trust in God” or “through talking about our common Christian faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:12 e6py rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστεως 1 See how you translated this word in [verse 5](../01/05.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:13 yi1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ θέλω δὲ ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I definitely want you to be informed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1:13 rwzn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀγνοεῖν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:13 u1cq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1:13 zvrj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἐκωλύθην ἄχρι τοῦ δεῦρο 1 Paul assumes that his readers will know that **until now** means “even at the present time.” He does not mean that he was no longer **hindered** at the moment he wrote these words. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but I have been hindered and still am now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:13 b92o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκωλύθην 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God hindered me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:13 gnu7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα τινὰ καρπὸν σχῶ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here, **fruit** could refer to: (1) people believing in the gospel as a result of Paul’s preaching, which would connect this verse to the idea in [verse 15](../01/15.md). Alternative translation: “so that I might lead people to salvation among you also” (2) strengthening the believers in Rome, in which case this would have the same meaning as “some spiritual gracious gift” in [verse 11](../01/11.md). Alternative translation: “so that I might strengthen you also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:14 s4bm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὀφειλέτης εἰμί 1 Paul speaks figuratively of himself as if he was a **debtor** who owed money to people who were not Jews, such as **Greeks** and **barbarians**. Paul means that he was obligated to preach the gospel to non-Jews because God had commanded him to do so. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation, “I am obliged to preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:14 j2sz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις 1 Here Paul uses **Greeks** and **barbarians** figuratively to represent all the Gentiles referred to in the previous verse. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all types of Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 1:14 lio6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις 1 Paul speaks figuratively here, using **wise ones** and **foolish ones** to represent all types of people among the Gentiles referred to in the previous verse. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all types of people among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 1:14 q728 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις, σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that he is obligated to preach the gospel to every kind of Gentile. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “to each and every kind of Gentile” or “to every single non-Jewish person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1:15 h9zv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὕτως 1 **So** here indicates that this a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “This is the reason why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1:16 oa6m rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** indicates the reason why Paul is eager to proclaim the gospel in Rome. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am eager to do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1:16 mm2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ & ἐπαισχύνομαι 1 Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am greatly honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1:16 nvkv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐ & ἐπαισχύνομαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 Here, **gospel** refers specifically to the preaching of the **gospel** that was mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not ashamed to preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1:16 f5x9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δύναμις γὰρ Θεοῦ ἐστιν εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **gospel** as the powerful way that **God** saves people. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for it is the powerful way that God saves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:16 sz5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Here, **for** indicates that **salvation** is the result of the gospel. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “that results in the salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1:16 merb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν παντὶ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for saving everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:16 htqe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to everyone who believes that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1:16 dwtm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι 1 Paul is speaking of Jewish people and Greek people in general, not of one particular Jew or Greek. If this might confuse your readers, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “both to the Jewish people first and to the Greek people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1:16 u8on rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον 1 The phrase **the Jew first** means that the Jewish people were the first people to hear the gospel. Paul does not mean that **the Jew** is better or has a high status than **the Greek**. If this would confuse your readers, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “both to the Jews who first heard the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:16 al16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἕλληνι 1 Here, **the Greek** refers to non-Jewish people in general. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the non-Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:17 of98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** indicates that what follows is the reason why the gospel is the power of God that leads to salvation, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The gospel can save everyone who believes because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1:17 wfsc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it reveals the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:17 h38h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται 1 Paul speaks figuratively about **the righteousness of God** as if it was an object that could be **revealed**. He means that people learn about the righteousness of God when someone proclaims the gospel to them. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “when people preach the gospel, those who hear it learn about the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:17 qr31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul is using the possessive form **of God** that could refer to: (1) righteousness that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the righteousness from God” (2) righteousness that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “God’s righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:17 gsl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** in another way. Alternate translation: “how God causes people to become righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:17 ii3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῷ 1 The pronoun **it** here refers to “the gospel” that was mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1:17 jl9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν 1 Here, **from faith to faith** describes how **the righteousness of God is revealed**. It is an idiom that could mean: (1) completely by faith alone. Alternate translation: “by faith from beginning to end” or “through faith from first to last” (2) by the faith that all believers share, like how the phrase “from sea to sea” means “from one sea to another sea.” Alternate translation: “from one person’s faith to another person’s faith” (3) by faith that leads to increasing faith. Alternate translation: “through faith for faith” or “from one degree of faith to another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1:17 igg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Here Paul uses **just as it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Habakkuk 2:4](../../hab/02/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1:17 bgvh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Habakkuk. Alternate translation: “just as the prophet Habakkuk wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:17 oih2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ὁ δὲ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται 1 In this sentence Paul quotes [Habakkuk 2:4](../../hab/02/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1:17 a9y7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται 1 Here, **live** could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternative translation: “will live eternally by faith” (2) the quality of one’s physical life. Alternative translation: “will truly live by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:17 e7eu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστεως 2 See how you translated this word in [verse 5](../01/05.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:18 c69s rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** indicates that what follows is the reason why “the righteous one must live by faith,” as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The righteous one must live this way because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1:18 r15v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀποκαλύπτεται & ὀργὴ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is revealing his wrath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:18 wzy3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὀργὴ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses **wrath** figuratively to refer to the outcome of God’s **wrath**, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God’s wrathful punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1:18 kjen rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **ungodliness** and **unrighteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “against all the ungodly and unrighteous acts of men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:18 fz23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, **ungodliness and unrighteousness of men** figuratively refer to the people who do ungodly and unrighteous things. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “against people who do any ungodly or unrighteous deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1:18 td8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **unrighteousness** and **truth**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “who, because they do not want to act righteously, keep holding back what is true about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:18 rztp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1:18 g3qm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων 1 This phrase gives us further information about the nature of people, who are called ** men** in the previous phrase. It is not making a distinction between different kinds of **men**. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “these same people who in unrighteousness are holding back the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1:18 k4ql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων 1 Here Paul speaks of **truth** figuratively as though it were a person who could be restrained or held back. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “who in unrighteousness prevent the truth from being known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1:19 jd85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that it is any person. Alternate translation: “what people can know about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:19 r6ef rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς & αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the ungodly and unrighteous people mentioned in the previous verse. Unless, otherwise noted, **them**, “their”, and “they” refer to ungodly and unrighteous people throughout [verses 19–32](../01/19.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these ungodly and unrighteous people … all these ungodly and unrighteous people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1:20 fo6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὰ & ἀόρατα αὐτοῦ & καθορᾶται; ἥ τε ἀΐδιος αὐτοῦ δύναμις καὶ θειότης 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **qualities**, **power**, and **nature**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what people cannot see about God, both how eternally powerful he is and who he is are clearly seen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:20 szu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καθορᾶται 1 Paul uses **seen** figurative to refer to perceiving something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are clearly perceived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:20 abdl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθορᾶται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people can clearly see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:20 uvc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche κόσμου 1 Paul uses **the world** figuratively to refer to the whole universe. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of all that God made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1:20 dr8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς ποιήμασιν νοούμενα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which the things God has made understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:20 dxr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἀναπολογήτους 1 **So** indicates that this is a result clause. Use the natural way in your language to express result. Alternate translation: “As a result, they are without excuse” or “This is why they are without excuse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1:21 pgta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γνόντες τὸν Θεὸν 1 Here Paul uses **having known** to imply that these people know about God or know that God exists. He does not mean that they know God personally. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having known about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:21 iasg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet οὐχ ὡς Θεὸν ἐδόξασαν ἢ ηὐχαρίστησαν 1 Here, **not glorify him** and **nor give him thanks** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that ungodly people dishonor God. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “they thanklessly despise God” or “they completely disregard God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1:21 c6v7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ηὐχαρίστησαν 1 Here Paul speaks of expressions of **thanks** figuratively as if they were something that could be given to a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did they thank him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:21 dant rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how foolish these ungodly people became by refusing to honor God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “they became completely senseless in the way they think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1:21 xm6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they began to think futile things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:21 d2c0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of the **heart** as if it could mentally sense things or could become black in color. He also uses **darkened** figuratively to refer to someone losing the ability to understand something. He means that these people lack spiritual sensitivity and are unable to understand spiritual things. If your readers would not understand what a **senseless heart** or **darkened** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “their heart became incapable of feeling or understanding spiritual things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:21 t4p7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καρδία 1 Here Paul uses **heart** figuratively to refer a person’s inner being or mind. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “inner being” or “mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1:21 sw8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns καρδία 1 The word **heart** is a singular noun that refers to the inner beings or minds of a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “inner beings” or “hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 1:22 ddr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἐμωράνθησαν 1 The phrase **they became foolish** is in contrast to what these unrighteous people claimed about themselves in the previous phrase. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but they became foolish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1:22 ly68 ἐμωράνθησαν 1 Alternate translation: “they became fools” or “they acted like fools” or “they started acting like fools” 1:23 k9xu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, **and** indicates that what follows describes what these ungodly and unrighteous people did after they “became foolish,” as stated in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “then they” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1:23 x2wl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ ἤλλαξαν τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν. 1 Paul uses **exchanged** figuratively to describe the actions of these ungodly people as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped worshiping God and started worshiping idols that resembled these creatures. If your readers would not understand what **exchanged** means in this context, you could use an express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “then they stopped glorifying the imperishable God in order to worship images things that God created: perishable humans, birds, four-footed animals, and creeping things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:23 qb7f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 The two phrases **the glory of the imperishable God** and **a likeness of an image of perishable man** mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing with similar phrases to emphasize the contrast between **God** and **man**. Use a natural way in your language to express a contrast that uses parallel ideas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1:23 r14e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what glorifies the imperishable God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:23 u971 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe the relationship between **glory** and **the imperishable God**. This phrase could refer to: (1) the glory that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “the glory that characterizes the imperishable God” (2) the glory that belongs to God. Alternate translation: “the glory that belongs only to the imperishable God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:23 rfez rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος 1 The words translated as **likeness** and **image** were used in the Greek translation of the Old Testament to refer to the same thing ([Genesis 1:26](../gen/01/26.md)). Here Paul is using the possessive form to indicate that **image** is an explanation of **likeness**. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “a likeness, that is, an image” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:23 osrt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “and likenesses of birds, and likenesses of four-footed animals, and likenesses of creeping things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1:23 rq7h τετραπόδων 1 The phrase **four-footed beasts** refers to animals that walk on four feet. Use the most natural form to describe this kind of animal in your language. Alternate translation: “of quadrupeds” or “of four-legged beasts” 1:24 fvv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 **Therefore** here introduces a result clause. Paul is stating the result of people rejecting the glory of God in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “This is why” or “Because of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1:24 ec9q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if **God** were physically giving them to **lusts**. He means that God is allowing them to have what they desire. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God permitted them to become controlled by the lusts of their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:24 tlv5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **lusts** that come from **their hearts**. If this is not clear in your language, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the lusts that come from their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:24 le2o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν 1 See how you translated “heart” in [verse 21](../01/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1:24 rkou rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν 1 This is a result clause. Paul is stating the result of people indulging in **the lusts of their hearts**. Use the natural way in your language to express result. Alternate translation: “resulting in uncleanness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1:24 ze8i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **uncleanness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to become unclean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:24 g0r4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν 1 Here Paul uses **uncleanness** figuratively to refer to sexual immorality as if it were something dirty. He means that these lustful people become spiritually impure as a result of doing sexually immoral acts. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “to become sexually immoral” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:24 puad rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι 1 Here, **to dishonor** could refer to: (1) the result of God giving the people **over to their lusts**. Alternate translation: “which results in them dishonoring” (2) the purpose for which **God gave them over to their lusts**. Alternate translation: “in order to dishonor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1:24 a8pm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι τὰ σώματα αὐτῶν 1 In this clause Paul uses **dishonor their bodies** figuratively to refer to sexually immoral acts. This is a polite way of referring to a shameful act. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to commit sexually immoral acts” or “to indulging in sexually immoral activity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1:25 dv6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἵτινες μετήλλαξαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει 1 Paul uses **exchanged** figuratively to describe the actions of these ungodly people as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped believing what is true about God and started believing in idols, which are false gods. If your readers would not understand what **exchanged** means in this context, you could use an express the meaning plainly. See how you translated **exchanged** in [verse 23](../01/23.md). Alternative translation, “these people refuse to trust what God says is true and accept what is false” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:25 koee rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **lie**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is correct about God for what is incorrect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:25 e9pj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **truth** that is about **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “true” instead of the noun **truth**. Alternate translation: “the truth about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:25 bl7p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐσεβάσθησαν καὶ ἐλάτρευσαν 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that these people completely rejected worshiping the true **God**. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “wholeheartedly worshiped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1:25 x3t4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ κτίσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **creation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what was created” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:25 xrsa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας 1 This phrase gives us further information about **the Creator**. It is not making a distinction between **God** and **the Creator**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “God who is blessed to eternity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1:25 m8zg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας 1 After naming **the Creator**, Paul adds a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may he be blessed to eternity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 1:25 v1ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj εὐλογητὸς 1 Paul is using the adjective **blessed** as a noun in order to describe **the Creator**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the blessed one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1:26 sk6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 24](../01/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:26 hw81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πάθη ἀτιμίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **passions** that are characterized by **dishonor**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “dishonorable” instead of the noun “dishonor.” Alternate translation: “dishonorable passions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:26 lk73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πάθη ἀτιμίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **passions** and **dishonor**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “dishonor themselves by doing what they are passionate about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:26 j4ni rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 The word translated **for** introduces an explanation of **passions of dishonor**. This explanation begins after the word **for** and continues through the end of the next verse. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “That is,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1:26 jqyi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μετήλλαξαν τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν εἰς τὴν παρὰ φύσιν 1 Paul uses **exchanged** figuratively to describe the actions of ungodly women as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped doing **natural** sexual acts with men and started doing sexual acts with other women that are **contrary to nature**. If your readers would not understand what **exchanged** means in this context, you could use an express the meaning plainly. See how you translated **exchanged** in [verses 23](../01/23.md) and [25](../01/25.md). Alternative translation, “stopped doing natural sexual acts with men and started doing unnatural sexual acts with women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:26 vs4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν 1 Paul uses **the natural use** figuratively to refer to sexual activity between women and men. This is a polite way of referring to something that would be offensive in some cultures. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sexual activity with males” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1:26 qvr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τὴν παρὰ φύσιν 1 Paul uses **contrary to nature** figuratively to refer to sexual activity between women and other women. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “sexual activity with females” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1:27 ji3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὁμοίως τε καὶ οἱ ἄρσενες 1 This phrase emphasizes that what follows is similar to [1:26](../01/26.md). Alternate translation: “in the same way even the males” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1:27 gn3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀφέντες 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these men as if they were leaving their location to go to another one. He means that they are abandoning or rejecting the way God intended for people to do sexual acts. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “having abandoned” or “having rejected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:27 g3ja rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν τῆς θηλείας 1 See how you translated **the natural use** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1:27 qvi3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν τῆς θηλείας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the natural use** that is associated with **the female**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an alternative expression. Alternate translation: “the natural use associated with the female” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:27 pqpo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τῆς θηλείας 1 Paul is speaking of these females in general, not of one particular **female**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of females” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1:27 yvm1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξεκαύθησαν ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **lust** as if it were something that could burn like a fire. He means that their **lust** is out of control like a burning fire. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “passionately lusted after one another” or “intensely desired each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:27 ylj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξεκαύθησαν ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **lust**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “burned lustfully for one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:27 kxwj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ἄρσενες ἐν ἄρσεσιν τὴν ἀσχημοσύνην κατεργαζόμενοι 1 This phrase refers to men doing sexual acts with other men. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “males shamelessly engaging in sexual activity with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1:27 u2hh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατεργαζόμενοι 1 Paul speaks figuratively of men doing sexual acts with each other as if it could produce something. He means that what they are doing is morally shameful. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “committing” or “engaging in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:27 sjhb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καὶ τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες 1 In the original language the phrase **the penalty** is at the front of the clause for emphasis. If it would be more natural in your language, you could arrange the order of these phrases to show that emphasis. Alternate translation: “and the penalty which was necessary for their perversion receiving in themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1:27 jtru rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 2 Here, **and** indicates that what follows is the result of the **shameless acts**. Alternate translation: “and as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1:27 raet rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the penalty** for their sinful activity as if it were something that they could receive inside of themselves. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “experiencing in their own bodies” or “receiving among themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:27 x6fz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **penalty**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the punishing act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:27 dbtt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **perversion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “which was necessary for their perverted acts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:28 bt7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐκ ἐδοκίμασαν, τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει 1 The phrase **having God in their full awareness** is an idiom that means “thinking about God” or “acknowledging God.” If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “they did not approve of thinking about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1:28 f53x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **full awareness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being fully aware of God” or “fully acknowledging that God exists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:28 yy1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verses 24](../01/24.md) and [26](../01/26.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:28 p8z2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν 1 Paul is speaking of the minds of these ungodly people in general, not of one particular **mind**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “to disapproved minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1:28 r1pt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν 1 Here, **mind** refers to a person’s will and moral reasoning. The **mind** of one of these ungodly people is **disapproved**, which means that it has been rejected by God as worthless. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state these ideas explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a mind that has become worthless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:28 ie4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ποιεῖν 1 Here, **to do** could refer to: (1) the result of **a disapproved mind**. Alternate translation: “as a result they do” or “causing them to practice” (2) the purpose of **a disapproved mind**. Alternate translation: “so that they do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1:28 aye6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα 1 The phrase **those things that are not proper** refers to what Paul describes in [verses 29–31](../01/29.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those improper things that follow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1:29 c2e2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 29–31](../01/29.md) Paul uses a repetitive series of sentences and ideas to show how evil these ungodly and unrighteous people are. This is a list of the “things that are not proper” of which those people in [verses 18–28](../01/18.md) are guilty. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) 1:29 v0zj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ 1 Paul uses **filled with** figuratively to refer to these ungodly people as if they were a container **filled with** the sins that Paul lists in this clause. Like a container that has been **filled with** something, the people are completely controlled by these sins. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully controlled by unrighteousness, wickedness, covetousness, and malice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:29 t4qm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πεπληρωμένους 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they filled themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1:29 uqks rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ; 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unrighteousness**, **wickedness**, **covetousness**, and **malice**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “filled with all unrighteous, wicked, covetous, and malicious thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:29 a7s3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας 1 Paul uses **full of** figuratively to refer to these ungodly people as if they were a container **full of** the sins that Paul lists in this clause. Like a container that is **full of** something, the people are completely controlled by these sins. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully controlled by envy, murder, strife, deceit, and evil intent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:29 dzda rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **envy**, **murder**, **strife**, **deceit**, and **evil intent**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they are full of envious, murderous, contentious, and deceitful thoughts, and they intend to do evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:30 f4tt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj θεοστυγεῖς, ὑβριστάς, ὑπερηφάνους, ἀλαζόνας & ἀπειθεῖς 1 Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who hate God, people who are insolent, people who are arrogant, people who are boastful … people who are disobedient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1:30 th8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καταλάλους & ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **slanderers** and **inventors** in another way. Alternate translation: “people who speak against others … people who invent ways to do evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:30 qq50 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **inventors** who invent **evil things**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they invent evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:31 i7ix rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀσυνέτους, ἀσυνθέτους, ἀστόργους, ἀνελεήμονας 1 Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are senseless, faithless, heartless, and merciless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1:32 cxx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ δικαίωμα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteous decree**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is rightly decreed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:32 ytu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **the righteous decree** that comes from **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s righteous decree” or “what God decrees is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1:32 z12q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, **that** indicates that what follows is the content of the **the righteous decree of God**. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “namely,” or “in other words,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1:32 iqg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὰ τοιαῦτα & αὐτὰ & τοῖς πράσσουσιν 1 The pronouns **such things** and **things** and **them** refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in [verses 28–31](../01/28/md). If this would confuse your readers, you could make state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things … these improper things … those who keep doing these improper things” or “these kinds of evil things … these evil things … those who keep doing these evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1:32 p9e9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἄξιοι θανάτου 1 Paul is using the adjective **worthy** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who deserve death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1:32 t0ls rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1:32 awth rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν 1 Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die spiritually” or “are worthy of spiritual death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:intro dse2 0 # Romans 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n3. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20)\n * All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32)\n * All Jews have sinned (2:1–3:8)\n\nIn this chapter Paul shifts his audience from Roman Christians to people who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “The Law”\n\nIn this chapter Paul uses the singular noun “the law” to refer to the group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. Paul says that those who try to obey the Law of Moses will not be justified by trying to obey it. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\nIn [verses 1–5](../02/01.md) Paul uses the singular pronoun “you” and the singular noun “man” to refer to all people in general. If your language does not use singular pronouns or singular nouns to refer to a group of people, you can use a different expression. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-crowd]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 2:1 y6ts rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 **Therefore** here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the consequences of the behavior that Paul described in [1:18–32](../01/18.md). Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “So then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:1 d7pj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-crowd εἶ & κρίνεις & σεαυτὸν κατακρίνεις & πράσσεις, ὁ κρίνων 1 Paul uses the singular pronoun **you** here to refer to all people in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “every one of you is … every one of you judges … every one of you condemns yourself … every one of you who judges practices” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-crowd]]) 2:1 atxo ἀναπολόγητος 1 See how you translated this phrase in [1:20](../01/20.md). 2:1 md5e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ὦ ἄνθρωπε 1 **O man** here is an exclamation that is meant to convict every judgmental person in the human race. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 2:1 x3mi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ἄνθρωπε 1 Here, **man** is a singular noun that refers to humanity in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter Alternate translation: “human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 2:1 n2mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **for** introduces a reason clause. In the rest of the verse Paul gives the reasons why **anyone who judges** is **without excuse**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:1 jt4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν ᾧ 1 The word translated **that which** is a pronoun that refers to any way or any time a person might judge someone else. You may need to make this explicit in your language. Alternate translation: “anytime” or “in anything that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2:1 ybp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τὸν ἕτερον 1 Here, **the other** refers to any other person. You may need to make this explicit in your language. Alternate translation: “any other person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 2:1 nz11 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **for** introduces a clause that explains why these judgmental people are self-condemned. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:1 wumc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὰ & αὐτὰ 1 The phrase **the same things** refers to acts for which people judge one another. Use a natural way in your language to communicate this idea. Alternate translation: “the very same deeds” or “the same things you judge them for doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2:2 jr4i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν 1 Here, **we** could refer to: (1) Paul and the church at Rome. Alternate translation: “all of us believers in Christ” (2) mankind in general. Alternate translation: “all people” Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 2:2 qca8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the judgment** that **God** does. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment” or “how God judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:2 kfy1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν κατὰ ἀλήθειαν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **judgment** and **truth**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how God judges is according to what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:2 lfqn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ ἀλήθειαν 1 This phrase indicates the manner in which God will judge those who act sinfully. He will judge them according to the sins they truly committed. If this phrase might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “based on the facts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:2 j46f τοὺς & πράσσοντας 1 See how you translated this phrase in [1:32](../01/32/.md). 2:2 mjao rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ τοιαῦτα 1 Here, **such things** refers to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in [1:28–32](../01/28/md). If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things” or “these kinds of evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:3 zwg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion λογίζῃ δὲ τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ? 1 Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that God will finally judge them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But you should not think, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things, that you will escape from the judgment of God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 2:3 jct9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο 1 The pronoun **this** refers to the final clause of this verse **that you will escape from the judgment of God**. You could use a natural way in your language to make this idea explicit. Alternate translation: “this fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2:3 ysys rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “that you will escape from the judgment of God, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 2:3 rk75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ὦ ἄνθρωπε 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 2:3 mo4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ τοιαῦτα & αὐτά 1 The phrases **such things** and **the same things** refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in [1:28–32](../01/28/md). See how you translated **such things** in [verse 2](../02/02.md) and **the same things** in [verse 1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:3 bd82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **judgment** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who someone could **escape** from. Paul means that no one can avoid God’s judgment. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “that you will not prevent God’s judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2:3 hpej rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 2](../02/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:4 pex3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας καταφρονεῖς, ἀγνοῶν ὅτι τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει? 1 Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that **the kindness of God leads** them **to repentance**. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You who scorn the riches of his kindness and forbearance and patience surely know that the kindness of God leads you to repentance!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 2:4 v9yf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-crowd καταφρονεῖς & σε 1 In this verse Paul uses the singular pronoun **you** here to refer to all of humanity in general. See how you translated **you** in [verses 1](../02/01.md) and [3](../02/03.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-crowd]]) 2:4 w537 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας 1 Paul speaks figuratively of God’s **kindness and forbearance and patience** as if they were wealth that could be acquired or rejected. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “acquiring his wonderful kindness and forbearance and patience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:4 swj9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words **kindness**, **forbearance**, and **patience**, you could express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of how kind, forbearing, and patient he is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:4 pplt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας & τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe the **kindness**, **forbearance**, and **patience** that characterize **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of God’s kindness, forbearance, and patience … God’s kindness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:4 acip rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει 1 Paul speaks of **the kindness of God** figuratively as if it were a person who could lead someone **to repentance**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God uses his kindness to cause you to repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2:4 u0io rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει 1 Here, **to repentance** is a goal clause. Paul is stating the goal of **the kindness of God**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a goal clause. Alternate translation: “leads you to repent” or “guides you to deeply change the way you perceive things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 2:4 jamv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετάνοιάν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **repentance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to deeply change the way you perceive things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:5 agl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατὰ δὲ τὴν σκληρότητά σου 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were a hard substance. He means that these people stubbornly refuse to repent from their judgmental way of life. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “But according to your stubbornness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:5 v6z1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀμετανόητον καρδίαν 1 Here, **heart** figuratively refers to a person’s will or inner being. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “unrepentant will” or “unwillingness to repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:5 fv4k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θησαυρίζεις σεαυτῷ ὀργὴν 1 Here Paul speaks of **wrath** figuratively as if it were an object that someone could store up. He means that the longer people refuse to repent, the greater is God’s wrath against them. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you are increasing how much wrath God has against you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:5 s7cs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὀργὴν & ὀργῆς 1 Here Paul uses **wrath** figuratively to refer to the outcome of God’s **wrath**, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in [1:18](../01/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:5 pck0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul assumes that his readers will know that both **the day of wrath** and **the revelation of the righteous judgment of God** refer to the time in the future when God will punish all wicked people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time God finally punishes wicked people and reveals his righteous judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:5 uz3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **day** that is characterized by **wrath** and by **the revelation of the righteous judgment of God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning differently. Alternate translation: “on the day characterized by God’s wrath and the revelation of his righteous judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:5 ay1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **wrath**, **revelation**, and **judgment**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “on the day of God’s wrathful acts when he reveals how righteously he judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:5 fnpj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the righteous judgment of God** as what **the revelation** reveals. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an alternate expression. Alternate translation: “when God reveals his righteous judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:5 sume rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the righteous judgment** that is carried out by **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an alternate expression. Alternate translation: “of God judging righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:6 frov rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ 1 This clause is a quotation from the Old Testament ([Psalm 62:12](../psa/062/012.md)). If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 2:6 jwcx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ 1 Here Paul uses **pay back** figuratively to refer to appropriately punishing or rewarding someone as if the punishment or reward was reciprocal payment for that person’s deeds. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will appropriately punish or reward each one according to his deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:6 gj1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **deeds** in another way. Alternate translation: “how he acts” or “what he does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:7 ylpm General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 7–10](../02/07.md) Paul explains what he means when he said in [verse 6](../02/06.md) that God will “pay back to each according to his deeds.” 2:7 rrbf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τοῖς & καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον; 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “eternal life to those who are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility according to endurance of good work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 2:7 gec6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “eternal life is what God pays back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2:7 sqdo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς & ζητοῦσιν 1 Paul uses **seeking** figuratively to refer to these people as if they were trying to find something. He means that they are trying to live in such a way as to obtain **glory and honor and incorruptibility**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to those who … keep trying to attain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:7 zyff τοῖς & καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ & ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 Here, **according to** could indicate: (1) the means by which these people **are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility**. Alternate translation: “everlasting life to those who, by means of endurance of good work, are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility” (2) the reason why God gives these people **everlasting live**. Alternate translation: “because they endure in good work and are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility, everlasting life” 2:7 d2gw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **endurance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to the fact that they keep on doing good work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:7 ub51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **glory**, **honor**, and **incorruptibility** in another way. Alternate translation: “for God to glorify, honor, and cause them to live forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:8 j1e6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξ ἐριθείας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **ambition**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from being selfishly ambitious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:8 fcb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet καὶ ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how sinful these people are. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “who are disobedient to all that is true and right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2:8 xhtm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 Here, **the truth** is spoken of figuratively as if it were a person whom someone could disobey, and **unrighteousness** is spoken of as if it were a person whom someone could obey. Paul means that these people reject what God says is true and right by **disobeying** him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who reject what God says is true and right by disobeying him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2:8 m7pm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀληθείᾳ & τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **unrighteousness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is true … what is unrighteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:8 ytny rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the [verse 6](../02/06.md). Alternate translation: “wrath and anger is what God pays back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2:8 exor rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὀργὴ 1 Here Paul uses **wrath** figuratively to refer to the outcome of God’s **wrath**, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in [1:18](../01/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:8 wa6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **wrath** and **anger**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God is wrathful and angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:8 blwx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός 1 The words **wrath** and **anger** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize God’s intense anger toward people who are **disobedient to the truth**. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “fierce wrath” or “angry wrath” or “wrathful anger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2:9 ospb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία, ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου τοῦ κατεργαζομένου τὸ κακόν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **Tribulation and distress** as if these ideas were located on top of a person. He means that every **evil** person will experience **Tribulation and distress**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Every human soul that produces the evil will experience tribulation and distress” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:9 qonf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **Tribulation** and ** distress**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “difficult and distressing times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:9 u8f7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία 1 These two words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how intense God’s judgment will be against these people. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Distressing tribulation” or “Intense distress” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2:9 ck9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου 1 Paul uses **soul of man** to refer to the whole life of a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could use express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 2:9 msox rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπου 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2:9 n7q4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸ κακόν 1 Paul is using the adjective **evil** as a noun in order to describe things people do. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “what is evil” or “things that are evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 2:9 a9s5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰουδαίου τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνος 1 This phrase could mean: (1) the Jews will have greater responsibility because God offered salvation to them first. Alternate translation: “especially for the Jewish person and also for the non-Jewish person” (2) the Jews will be judged before non-Jews, which is the same meaning as in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “first for the Jewish person and then for the non-Jewish person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:9 csnc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἕλληνος 1 See how you translated this phrase in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:10 i9tg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόξα & καὶ τιμὴ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory** and **honor**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God will glorify and honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:10 t2od rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰρήνη 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Here, **peace** could refer to: (1) feeling calm and secure. Alternate translation: “a peaceful feeling” (2) being at peace with God. Alternate translation: “a peaceful relationship with God” (3) both a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God. “a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:10 ib56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸ ἀγαθόν 1 Paul is using the adjective **good** as a noun in order to describe things people do. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “good deeds” or “things that are good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 2:10 u06j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι 1 See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:11 eol0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐ & ἐστιν προσωπολημψία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **favoritism**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God does not honor one type of person above another” or “God is not more favorable toward one person than another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:12 wkx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in [verses 12–16](../02/12.md) gives the reason for the phrase “there is no favoritism with God” in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to make this emphasis explicit. Alternate translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:12 ecsk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅσοι & ἀνόμως ἥμαρτον 1 Paul uses this phrase to refer to non-Jews, which he calls “the Greek” in [verses 9–10](../02/09.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many non-Jewish people as have sinned without the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:12 t3qs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ἀνόμως & ἀνόμως & νόμῳ & νόμου 1 The word **law** is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “without God’s laws … without God’s laws … God’s laws … God’s laws” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 2:12 m6cy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνόμως & ἀνόμως 1 Here, **without the law** refers to not knowing God’s **law**. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without knowing God’s law” or “in ignorance of God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2:12 qkh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καὶ ἀπολοῦνται 1 Here Paul uses **perish** figuratively to refer to eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will also be punished eternally” or “will also experience eternal punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:12 jwvz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅσοι ἐν νόμῳ ἥμαρτον 1 Paul uses this phrase to refer to Jews, who are the people to whom God gave his law. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many Jewish people as have sinned with the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:12 w4cp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διὰ νόμου κριθήσονται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will judge by his law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2:12 a0k4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ νόμου 1 Here, **by** indicates that **the law** is the standard by which God will judge those who know his law. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to what the law requires” or “by what the law says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:13 sw8x rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that this verse gives the reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “God judges both groups of people impartially because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:13 a8ra rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns νόμου & νόμου 1 See how you translated **the law** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 2:13 eg4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ & δίκαιοι παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 Paul uses **with God** figuratively here to describe **righteous** people as if they were located in the presence of **God**. He means that God makes them right with himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are not made righteous by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:13 c1bu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ ποιηταὶ νόμου δικαιωθήσονται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will justify the doers of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2:14 q2id rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that [verses 14–16](../02/14.md) give another reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in [verse 12](../02/12.md). [Verses 14–16](../02/14.md) explain why **Gentiles** who do not know God’s law are still sinners. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “God also judges both groups of people impartially because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:14 vlum rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰ μὴ νόμον ἔχοντα & νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they own or possess **the law**. He means that they are unaware of the law that God gave to the Jewish people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated “without the law” in [verse 12](../02/12.md). Alternative translation: “who are unaware of God’s law … who are unaware of God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:14 zhmw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns νόμον & τοῦ νόμου & νόμον 1 See how you translated **the law** in [verse 12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 2:14 h53h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns φύσει & ποιῶσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **nature** in another way. Alternate translation: “naturally do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:14 atda rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰ τοῦ νόμου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe the specific rules that make up **the law**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the rules within the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:14 symg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἑαυτοῖς εἰσιν νόμος 1 Here Paul speaks of **Gentiles** figuratively as if they were **a law**. Paul means that the non-Jewish people still have their own rules about what is right and wrong that are also part of God’s **law**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning in plainly. Alternate translation: “are actually obeying the God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2:15 xl6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of the non-Jewish people obeying some basic rules from the Law of Moses as if they were showing **the work of the law** to other people. He means that non-Jewish people demonstrate that they naturally understand some rules of the law by obeying those rules. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who make others aware that they understand the work of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:15 wtit rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the works of the law** as if they can be written on the surfaces of peoples’ hearts. He means that God has enabled non-Jewish people to know generally what is right or wrong even though they do not know the Law of Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they know the work of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:15 x35c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the work** that characterizes obeying **the law**. This phrase has a similar meaning to “the things of the law” in the previous verse. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the work that the law requires a person to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:15 v60q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God wrote on their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2:15 ja5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 See how you translated “heart” in [1:21](../01/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:15 jmeo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως 1 Paul uses the singular **conscience** figuratively to refer to the individual consciences of these people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “their consciences bearing witness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 2:15 z28q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως 1 Here Paul uses **conscience** figuratively as if it were a person **bearing witness** in a courtroom. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their conscience confirms that this is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2:15 ub8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish συνμαρτυρούσης & καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων 1 This clause explains what **bearing witness** means. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer or begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “bearing witness, namely, the thoughts of each person both accusing or even defending them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 2:15 qk53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων 1 Here, **thoughts** are spoken of figuratively as if they were a person who could accuse or defend someone in court. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation (remove preceding comma): “by accusing or defending them in the way they think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2:16 o6kx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ἡμέρᾳ 1 Here, **day** refers to a point in time when something happens. It does not refer to a 24-hour length of time. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a point in time is coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:16 c5fp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὅτε κρίνει ὁ Θεὸς 1 Paul assumes that his readers will know that **the day when God will judge** refers to the time in the future when God will judge everyone, as Paul also mentioned in [verses 2](../02/02.md) and [5](../02/05.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the future time when God finally judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:16 lyvd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **secrets** that **men** have. These **secrets** are specifically secret thoughts that people have, as indicated by the word “thoughts” in the previous verse. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “men’s secrets” or “the secrets that men keep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:16 gxet rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **secrets**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what men secretly think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:16 r8hz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of human beings” or “of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2:16 xb7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, διὰ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “through Christ Jesus, according to my gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 2:16 e9bp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου 1 Paul speaks figuratively of the **gospel** as if it belongs to him. He means that this is the **gospel** God has entrusted him to preach. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to God’s gospel that I preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:17 lc6m rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\n**But** here indicates that in [verses 17–29](../02/17.md) Paul changes topics from talking about non-Jewish people who don’t know the Law of Moses to Jews who know the Law. He explains why the Jews as well cannot escape God’s judgment. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that” or “However” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2:17 cnq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Here, **if** indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from this verse to [verse 21](../02/21.md). Paul speaks as if these descriptions of Jews were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that they are actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2:17 kfe8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd σὺ 1 Even though Paul is speaking to Jewish people, he is hypothetically addressing an individual, so **you** and **your** and **yourself** is singular throughout [2:17–27](../02/17.md) unless otherwise noted. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of **you** and **your** and **yourself** in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) 2:17 pglg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ἐπονομάζῃ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews as if they named themselves. He means that they consider themselves to be Jews. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “you call yourself Jewish” or “you regard yourself as truly Jewish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:17 gz6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐπαναπαύῃ νόμῳ, 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context, which is God’s judgment of sinners. Alternate translation: “rely upon the law to escape God’s judgment” or “rely upon the law to save you from God’s judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2:17 dapj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καυχᾶσαι ἐν Θεῷ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews as if they were boasting inside of **God**. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation that knows God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “brag that you are the only ones who know God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:18 xn6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ γινώσκεις τὸ θέλημα, καὶ δοκιμάζεις τὰ διαφέροντα, κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου, 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “and because you are instructed from the law, you know his will and approve of what is excellent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:18 qxkt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ θέλημα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **will** in another way. Alternate translation: “what God wills” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:18 aqbh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “others having instructed you from the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2:19 nk76 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns πέποιθάς τε σεαυτὸν ὁδηγὸν εἶναι 1 Paul uses the word **yourself** to emphasize how **convinced** the Jews are that they are the only ones who can spiritually guide others. Use a way that is natural in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “and you have convinced yourself that you alone are a guide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 2:19 wi7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν 1 Paul uses **guide** figuratively to refer to the Jews as if they were the only people who could clearly see. He also uses **blind** figuratively to refer to non-Jews as if they were unable to see. He means that the Jews think they are the only ones who can teach others God’s truth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that you are the only ones who can teach others what is true about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:19 beop rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **guide**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that you can guide blind men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:19 ql0b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τυφλῶν 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to blind people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2:19 j76c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὁδηγὸν & τυφλῶν, φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the two ideas into one. Alternate translation: “the only ones who can guide those who are unaware of what is true about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2:19 xlge rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει 1 Here Paul uses **light** figuratively to refer to a Jewish person, and he uses **those in darkness** figuratively to refer to non-Jews. He means that the Jews think they can teach non-Jews about God the way that a **light** shines on people who are in a dark place. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who can reveal what is true about God to those who do not know about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:20 ymey rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων, ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, since the third phrase gives the reason for the result that the first two phrases describe. Alternate translation: “since having in the law the form of the knowledge and of the truth, you believe you should be an instructor of foolish men, a teacher of little children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:20 pf6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the only people who can instruct those people who are as foolish as children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2:20 ar5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διδάσκαλον νηπίων 1 Paul speaks figuratively of the non-Jews as if they were **little children**. He means that they are ignorant about God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “people who are spiritually ignorant” or “people who are like uneducated infants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:20 ose0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the law** as if it were a physical shape that someone could possess. He means that **the law** contains God’s true knowledge that the Jews think they exclusively own. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “understanding through God’s law how a person can truly know God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:20 ua61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Paul is using the possessive forms **of the knowledge** and **of the truth** to describe the **form** of **the law**. Here, **of knowledge** and **of the truth** could indicate: (1) what **the law** contains. Alternate translation: “the form that contains the knowledge and the truth” (2) what **the law** represents. Alternate translation: “what represents knowledge and truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:20 y6i5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **knowledge** and ** truth**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what we know about God and what is true about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:21 vy0h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὁ οὖν διδάσκων ἕτερον, σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις? ὁ κηρύσσων μὴ κλέπτειν, κλέπτεις? 1 In [verses 21–23](../02/21.md) Paul transitions from his description of the Jews in [verses 17–20](../02/17.md) to a series of rhetorical questions. These questions emphasize the hypocrisy of the Jews, who thought they were superior to non-Jews because they knew the Law of Moses. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Paul’s words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “then you, who teach another, do not teach yourself! You, who preach not to steal, actually steal!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 2:21 rftq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases οὖν 1 Here, **then** indicates that what follows is the second half of the factual conditional statement that Paul began with “if you name yourself a Jew” in [verse 17](../02/17.md). Paul wants to show that what the Jews believe and how they live are in contrast. If you divided [verses 17–21](../02/17.md) into separate sentences, then you may need to include a short form of the “if” statement here. Alternate translation: “if all this is really true, then” or “since all this is really true, then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2:21 uq9y rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ἕτερον 1 Here, **another** is a singular pronoun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular pronouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “other people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 2:21 abq0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις 1 Here Paul implies that the Jews need to **teach** themselves because they do not actually obey the laws that they teach. They act as if they do not know the Law of Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “since you don’t obey the law, do you not teach yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:22 parm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὁ λέγων μὴ μοιχεύειν, μοιχεύεις? ὁ βδελυσσόμενος τὰ εἴδωλα, ἱεροσυλεῖς? 1 Like in the previous verse, Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form twice to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You, who says not to commit adultery, actually commit adultery! You, who abhor idols, actually rob temples!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 2:22 dmpg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἱεροσυλεῖς 1 Here Paul implies that the **temples** the Jews **rob** are where **idols** are kept and worshipped. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do you rob temples where idols are kept” or “should you actually enter an idol temple and rob it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:23 z80m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου, τὸν Θεὸν ἀτιμάζεις 1 Like in the previous two verses, Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You, who boast in the law, actually dishonor God through the transgression of the law!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 2:23 grr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι 1 Paul uses **in the law** figuratively as if it were something that people could boast inside of. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation who knows God’s law, which has similar meaning to “boast in God” in [verse 17](../02/17.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “You, who brag that you are the only ones who know God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2:23 ob98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **transgression**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by transgressing the law” or “by breaking the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:24 yp4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὸ γὰρ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, καθὼς γέγραπται 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For, just as it is written, ‘the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles because of you.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 2:24 z54i rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things I have said about you are true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:24 lk5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 In this clause Paul quotes part of [Isaiah 52:5](../../isa/52/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 2:24 c4sk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to indicate the **name** that belongs to **God**. Paul does not mean that **God** is a **name**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:24 mvwq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses **the name of God** figuratively to refer to**God** himself. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 2:24 ccm9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles blaspheme the name of God because of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2:24 m2bq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because of you the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:24 pg0g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 Paul quotes Isaiah implying that the bad behavior of the Jews is what causes **the Gentiles** to blaspheme **the name of God**. Since the Jews were supposed to represent God to the world, their bad behavior misrepresented God so that the Gentiles blasphemed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result of how you act” or “because of the way you behave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:24 e144 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 Here, **you** is the plural and refers to the Jewish people. This is the only occurrence of plural **you** in [verses 17–27](../02/17.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 2:24 edrf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote, you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2:24 end9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations γέγραπται 1 Here Paul uses **it is written** to indicate a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 52:5](../../isa/52/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 2:25 vdu7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that [verses 25–29] provide another reason why both Jews and Gentiles will be punished for their sins, as stated in [verse 12](../02/12.md). Paul is arguing against the idea that circumcision guaranteed a Jew’s salvation, which some Jews believed. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jews will be judged along with Gentiles because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:25 vp6o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns περιτομὴ & ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision** and **uncircumcision**, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “being circumcised … your being circumcised has become being uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:25 wm24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὠφελεῖ 1 Paul is leaving out a word here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “benefits you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2:25 pqhz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession παραβάτης νόμου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who transgresses **the law**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “one who transgresses the law” or “one who breaks the law”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:25 xq62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν 1 Here, **your circumcision becomes uncircumcision** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how important it is for God’s people to **practice the law**. Paul does not mean that the person who transgresses God’s **law** is no longer physically circumcised. If this would confuse your readers, you express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is as if you are not circumcised” or “it is the same as if you were never circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 2:26 vt7f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ἐὰν οὖν 1 Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the benefits for **the uncircumcised one** who **keeps the requirements of the law**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Let’s suppose then that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 2:26 r9i4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἡ ἀκροβυστία 1 Paul is using the adjective **uncircumcision** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the people who are uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 2:26 nf3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom φυλάσσῃ 1 Here, **keeps** is an idiom that means “obeys.” If your readers would not understand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is obedient to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2:26 mkhr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰ δικαιώματα τοῦ νόμου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **requirements** found in **the law**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “what the law requires” or “the law’s requirements” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:26 be71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται 1 Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize how important it is do what **the law** requires. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “certainly God will consider his uncircumcision to be circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 2:26 rjb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “will God not consider his circumcision to be circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2:26 gjuy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ & περιτομὴν 1 See how you translated these abstract nouns in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:27 rkxz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 **And** here could indicate that what follows is continuing the rhetorical question in the previous verse. If you choose the translate the passage in this way, then replace the ending exclamation point with a question mark. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2:27 lqz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία, τὸν νόμον τελοῦσα 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “since he is fulfilling the law, the uncircumcised by nature will judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:27 tpno rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἡ & ἀκροβυστία 1 See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 2:27 h2lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **nature**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the naturally uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:27 zwh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τελοῦσα 1 Here, **fulfilling** is an idiom that means “fully obeying.” If your readers would not understand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is fully obedient to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2:27 sv4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ γράμματος καὶ περιτομῆς 1 Here, **through** could mean: (1) the Jews will be judged despite having the **letter and circumcision**. Alternate translation: “despite having letter and circumcision” (2) the Jews will be judged while having the **letter and circumcision**. Alternate translation: “while having letter and circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:27 nxa1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy γράμματος 1 Paul is figuratively describing **the law** by association with the letters that make up **the law**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the written law code” or “God’s written law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:27 lkll rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns περιτομῆς 1 See how you translated this abstract noun in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:27 q795 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns παραβάτην νόμου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **transgressor** with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “someone who transgresses the law” or “someone who breaks God’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2:28 g2vh rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason for what has just been stated. This verse is Paul’s conclusion to the statements he made in [verses 25–27](../02/25.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Truly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2:28 lfuj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Ἰουδαῖός 1 Here Paul uses **Jew** to refer to someone who is one of God’s people because he truly trusts in God for salvation, like Abraham did. **Jew** here does not refer to someone who only has Jewish ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spiritual Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:28 rohy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ φανερῷ 1 Here, **visibly** refers to the Jewish religious practices that other people can see, such as circumcision or wearing special clothing. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does externally visible Jewish rituals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:28 n34i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ & περιτομή 1 Here Paul uses **circumcision** figuratively to refer to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This was called “circumcision of the heart” in the Old Testament ([Deuteronomy 30:6](../../deu/30/06.md); [Jeremiah 4:4](../../jer/04/04.md)). Here, **circumcision** does not refer to the Jewish ritual. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this spiritual circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:28 s44m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν σαρκὶ 1 Paul uses **the flesh** figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of **flesh**. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 2:29 b6ag rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ Ἰουδαῖος 1 The word translated **secretly** refers to something that other people cannot see or that is hidden. The meaning here is the opposite of “visibly” in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a Jew in an inward way not seen by others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:29 u7b6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Ἰουδαῖος 1 Here Paul uses **Jew** figuratively in the same way he did in the previous verse. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:29 d1go rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession περιτομὴ καρδίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **circumcision** that is performed in **the heart**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “circumcision is performed in the heart” or “circumcision is an inward change” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:29 hbiv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom περιτομὴ καρδίας 1 The phrase **circumcision of the heart** is an idiom that refers to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This expression first occurred in the Old Testament ([Deuteronomy 30:6](../../deu/30/06.md); [Jeremiah 4:4](../../jer/04/04.md)).If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. See how you translated “this circumcision” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “truly belonging to God’s people is by removal of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2:29 n4pp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καρδίας 1 See how you translated this word in [1:21](../01/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:29 ffa3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι 1 Here, both occurrences of **in** indicate the means by which something happened. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit, not by means of the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:29 kjc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν Πνεύματι 1 Here, **the Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, who changes a person’s thoughts and attitude when God saves that person, as in the UST. (2) a person’s spirit, which would require interpreting **in** to refer to a place. Alternate translation: “in one’s spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2:29 gcoq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy γράμματι 1 See how you translated **letter** in [verse 27](../02/27.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2:29 dlac rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος 1 The pronoun **whose** refers to **the one who is inwardly a Jew**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “that inward Jew’s praise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2:29 qa6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος 1 Paul is using the possessive form **whose** to indicate who receives **the praise**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “his praise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2:29 r4gm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “from people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 3:intro y2kb 0 # Romans 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n3. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18–3:20)\n * All non-Jews have sinned (1:18–32)\n * All Jews have sinned (2:1–3:8)\n * Everyone has sinned (3:9–20)\n4. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)\n * God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26)\n * No one can boast in works (3:27–31)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with [verses 4](../03/04.md) and [10–18](../03/10.md) of this chapter, which are quotations from the Old Testament.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nIn [verses 1–9](../03/01.md) and [27–31](../03/27.md) Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter in order to answer objections that Jews might make about what he is saying. You may need to indicate that Paul is asking these questions as if he were a non-Christian Jew responding to his arguments. When Paul asks the rhetorical questions, he is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. When Paul answers those questions, he is speaking as himself. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this change in speakers with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 3:1 v788 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIn [verses 1–9](../03/01.md) Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions and answers in order to emphasize that both “Jews and Greeks” are “under sin.” 3:1 a1l0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τί οὖν 1 Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in [2:28–29](../02/28.md). If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then what is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:1 dawv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς? 1 This verse contains two rhetorical questions connected by **or**. Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in [2:28–29](../02/28.md). If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then the Jew certainly has no advantage, and circumcision certainly has no benefit!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 3:1 b7ls rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς 1 In this verse Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 3:1 bjfo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **advantage** or **benefit**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “How then is being a Jew advantageous, or how is being circumcised beneficial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:1 h4h3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ Ἰουδαίου 1 Paul is using the possessive form **of the Jew** to describe for whom there is **the advantage**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “for the Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:1 l79f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς περιτομῆς 1 Paul is using the possessive form **of the circumcision** to describe from where **the benefit** comes. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “that comes from circumcision” or “from being circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:2 eq3o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον 1 In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Great in every way!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:2 rri9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The advantage of the Jew and the benefit of the circumcision is great is every way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 3:2 kzlh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον 1 **Great in every way** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize the value of being Jewish and being circumcised. Paul does not mean that everything about being a Jew and being circumcised is beneficial. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows enthusiasm. Alternate translation: “Great in many ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 3:2 f2fa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρῶτον μὲν & ὅτι 1 Here, **indeed first, that** could indicate that: (1) what follows is the first reason in a list of several reasons why being a Jew is beneficial, in which case Paul does not continue the list in this chapter. Alternate translation: “the first of many benefits is indeed that” or “one benefit is indeed that” (2) what follows is the most important reason why being a Jew is beneficial. Alternate translation: “the primary benefit is indeed that” or “the most important thing is indeed that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:2 mrej rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπιστεύθησαν τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God entrusted them with his sayings” or “God trusted them with the sayings of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:2 jkgk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **the sayings of God** could refer to: (1) the entire Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with what God said in the Scriptures” (2) direct speech from God in the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with the messages that God announced to them in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 3:2 qide rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, the possessive form **of God** could refer to: (1) **sayings** that came from **God**. Alternate translation: “with the sayings from God” (2) **says** that are about **God**. Alternate translation: “with the sayings about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:3 d9k3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:3 mclv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί & εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει? 1 In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But some of them were unfaithful! Their unfaithfulness surely cannot nullify the faithfulness of God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 3:3 fd0w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks τί γάρ εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει? 1 In this verse Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 3:3 i36p rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τινες 1 The pronoun **some** refers to some Jewish people. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “some Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 3:3 pkae rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **unfaithfulness** or **faithfulness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “The fact that they are unfaithful will not nullify God’s faithful acts, will it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:3 moq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the faithfulness** that characterizes **God**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the faithfulness that characterizes God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:4 djn7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ γένοιτο 1 In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:4 z465 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations μὴ γένοιτο 1 **May it never be** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong prohibition. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong prohibition. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not” or “Certainly not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 3:4 kz4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 **Instead** here indicates that what follows is a contrast to the idea in the previous verse that unfaithful Jews could “nullify the faithfulness of God.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “However” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 3:4 ld9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative γινέσθω & ὁ Θεὸς ἀληθής 1 Here, **let God be true** is an imperative phrase, but this is not a command. Instead, Paul is exclaiming that people must consider that God is always truthful regardless of what people think. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “let people always know that God is true” or “may people always declare that God is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 3:4 nud9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **liar**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “every man lies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:4 fesk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης 1 Paul is leaving out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “let every man be a liar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 3:4 hfdf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “every person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 3:4 te39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται 1 See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 3:4 b8gv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by David, a king of Israel. Alternate translation: “just as King David wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:4 f0oq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 51:4](../../psa/51/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 3:4 xli0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅπως 1 **So that** indicates that what follows is the result of what David had written previously in [Psalm 51:4](../../psa/51/04.md), which is about how David had sinned. Paul assumes that his readers would be familiar with the earlier part of that verse. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have sinned so that” or “Because of my sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:4 h0ne rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε 1 In this sentence, **you** and **your** refer to God and are singular. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 3:4 lnnr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δικαιωθῇς & ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people would acknowledge how righteous you are … when people attempt to judge you” or “you would prove yourself to be righteous … when others try to judge you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:4 tj8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου 1 Paul records David using **words** figuratively to describe the things that God said by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in what you say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 3:5 gw3a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases εἰ δὲ 1 **But** here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement that Paul made in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If indeed that is true” or “Now if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:5 putf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν? 1 In these sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 3:5 hjyp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ & ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? 1 Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument that an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God. Then what will we say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 3:5 y6vv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἐροῦμεν 1 Here, **our** and **we** are used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Jewish … will we Jews say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:5 y0r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind **unrighteousness** and **righteousness** in another way. Alternate translation: “how unrighteous we are … how righteous God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:5 ho67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν? 1 In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question here to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. This sentence is also the answer to the hypothetical question that precedes it. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God certainly cannot be unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 3:5 v30z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εἰ & ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν? 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine the hypothetical conditional statement of the first sentence with the rhetorical question of the second sentence. Alternate translation: “if our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God, then we certainly cannot say that God is unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 3:5 e9ux rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν ὀργήν 1 Here Paul uses **wrath** figuratively to refer to the outcome of God’s **wrath**, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of **wrath** in [1:18](../01/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 3:5 j631 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside (κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.) 1 Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to show that he is not trying to challenge **the righteousness of God**. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “I am reasoning like a human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]]) 3:5 sd4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom (κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.) 1 Here, the phrase **according to men** is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I speak based on how human beings perceive things” or “I speak according to mere human reasoning”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 3:6 gd5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations μὴ γένοιτο 1 See how you translated this in [verse 4](../03/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 3:6 zg9s rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐπεὶ πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον 1 Here Paul is giving the reason why God is “not unrighteous for imposing his wrath,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for expressing the reason why someone does something. Alternate translation: “Because if God were unrighteous, how would he judge the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:6 x1y3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον 1 In this clause Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question here to emphasize that **God** could not **judge the world** if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God certainly could not judge the world!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 3:6 lnp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν κόσμον 1 Here Paul uses **world** figuratively to refer to the people who live in the **world**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 3:7 htfa General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 7–9](../03/07.md), Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in [verse 6](../03/06.md). A note will inform you of the one parenthetic statement within these verses in which Paul interjects his own voice into the argument. 3:7 b9k1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases εἰ δὲ 1 **But** here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in the previous verse. See how you translated this in [verse 5](../03/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:7 c2u5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ & ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι 1 Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose the truth of God through my life abounds to his glory. Then why am I still being judged as a sinner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 3:7 xysz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But if the truth of God abounds to his glory through my lie” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 3:7 j9ji rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “how truthful God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:7 lbji rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the truth** that characterizes **God**. Use a natural way in your language to communicate this idea. Alternate translation: “God’s truthfulness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:7 fa7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι & κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς 1 Here Paul uses the pronoun **my** and **I** to refer to a Jewish person who might give this hypothetical response. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternative translation: “when we Jews act falsely … are we … as sinners” or “when we Jews lie … are we … as sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:7 o3po rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **lie**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “when I act falsely” or “when I lie” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:7 je41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **to** indicates that this is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “with the result that he is glorified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:7 h61j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “to demonstrate how glorious he is” or “to glorify him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:7 yv5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι 1 In this clause Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse, which was also repeated in the previous clause. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “surely I should not still be judged as a sinner!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 3:7 iiqc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἔτι κἀγὼ & κρίνομαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “does God still judge me” or “should God still keep on judging me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:7 pgus rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτωλὸς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sinner**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “someone who sins” or “as if I were sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:8 vw1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 **And** here indicates that in this verse Paul continues speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement he made in [verse 6](../03/06.md). If it would help your readers, you could state this with a fuller expression. Alternate translation: “Furthermore” or “In addition” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:8 kb9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καὶ μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά? 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “And not, ‘Let us do evil, so that good may come,’ just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm we say?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 3:8 wr3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ μὴ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And why not say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 3:8 pr4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ & ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά 1 In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using an elided question here to emphasize that God could not judge the world if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you should say … ‘Let us do the evil things, so that the good things may come!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 3:8 o3pz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν 1 Paul is saying this as an aside in order to show that people have been falsely accusing him of teaching that people should sin in order to show how good God is. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “Some people blaspheme us and affirm that we are saying such things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]]) 3:8 veic rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive βλασφημούμεθα & ἡμᾶς 1 When Paul says **we** and **us**, he could be (1) speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I am blasphemed … me” (2) speaking of himself and all other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians are blasphemed … us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:8 klaa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βλασφημούμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people blaspheme us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:8 vbpa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “not say (just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm us to say) that we should do the evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 3:8 pe2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν 1 Paul is saying this as an aside in order to show that the people who have been falsely accusing him of teaching people to “do the evil things, so that the good things may come” deserve to be judged by God. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]]) 3:8 re0k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν 1 The pronoun **whose** here refers to the people who slander Paul by claiming that he teaches people to “do the evil things, so that the good things may come.” If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the judgment of those who say this is just” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 3:8 g87e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who are justly judged” or “whom God justly judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:9 z3wu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τί οὖν? προεχόμεθα? 1 Here Paul concludes his series of rhetorical questions by using the same phrase **What then**. See how you translated this phrase in [verse 1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:9 y6uz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion προεχόμεθα? 1 Paul is using the question form to express the objection that a Jew might have to what Paul has said previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely we are not better off!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 3:9 ajj8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive προεχόμεθα 1 Here, **we** is used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellow Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Are we Jews better off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:9 g85q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations οὐ πάντως 1 **Not at all** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates a strong negative response to the previous statement. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not!” or “In no way!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 3:9 cbgq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐ πάντως 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We are not better off at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 3:9 a01e rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result προῃτιασάμεθα γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “We are not better off because we have already accused” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:9 qvjy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive προῃτιασάμεθα 1 Here, **we** could mean: (1) Paul is speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I have already accused” (2) Paul is speaking of himself and other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians have already accused” See how you translated **we** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:9 hgs3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἕλληνας 1 Here, **Greeks** refers to non-Jewish people in general. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “non-Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:9 x4eb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑφ’ ἁμαρτίαν 1 The phrase **under sin** is an idiom that means “under the power of sin” or “controlled by one’s desire to sin.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “controlled by sin” or “ruled by sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 3:10 m5r6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses [10–18](../03/10.md) Paul uses Old Testament quotations as a repetitive series of sentences in order to show how evil all types of people are. In [verses 10–12](../03/10.md) he emphasizes the general nature of their evil conduct by repeating the word **none** four times, and the phrase **not even one** twice. In [verses 13–18](../03/13.md) he uses specific examples of their evil conduct. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the accusations against humanity. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) 3:10 u88n rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται 1 See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 3:10 zkzr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “just as the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:10 ju1k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς 1 This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of [Psalm 14:3](../../psa/14/03.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 3:10 yt5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that **not** even one type of person is **righteous**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one type of person who is righteous” or “Absolutely no one who is righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 3:10 bscu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς 1 Paul is using the singular adjectives **none righteous** and **one** as nouns in order to describe all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “There are no righteous people, not any people” or “There is no righteous person, not even one person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 3:11 b0m7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων; οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν 1 This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of [Psalm 14:2](../../psa/14/02.md) and [Psalm 53:3](../../psa/53/03.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 3:11 kqs5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οὐκ ἔστιν & οὐκ ἔστιν 1 Paul is using the adjectives **none** as nouns in order to describe all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “There are no people … There are no people” or “There is no person … There is no person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 3:11 h9e9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων 1 Here, **who understands** refers to someone who is able to think wisely or correctly. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “There is none who is wise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:11 mn84 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν 1 Her, Paul quotes David using**seeks** figuratively to describe people attempting to know God as if God were lost and people needed to find him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who attempts to know God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:12 lg0i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks πάντες ἐξέκλιναν, ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν; οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός 1 This sentence is quotation of [Psalm 14:3](../../psa/14/03.md) and [Psalm 53:4](../../psa/53/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 3:12 cen3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξέκλιναν 1 Paul quotes David using **turned away** figuratively to describe these people as if they had left a path that leads to where God is. David means that they refuse to live according to God’s rules. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “refuse to live the way God requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:12 a72h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν 1 Here, **useless** implies that these sinful people are so sinful that they do not benefit God or humankind. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “They together became worthless for benefitting anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:12 na87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that **not even one** type of person can continually do **kindness**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one type of person who does kindness” or “Absolutely no one who is doing kindness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 3:12 v9ed rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οὐκ & ἑνός 1 See how you translated **none** and **one** in [verse 10](../03/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 3:12 b3g1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χρηστότητα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **kindness**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “what is kind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:13 xr4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν 1 These two sentences are a quotation from [Psalm 5:10](../../psa/05/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 3:13 c7rh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν; ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν 1 These three sentences mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing three times, in slightly different ways, to show how harmful the words are that these people say. If saying the same thing three times might confuse your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The things they say are deadly, deceptive, and damaging” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 3:13 nmrs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν 1 Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s throats in general, not of one particular **throat**. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “throats” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 3:13 sx6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul quotes David using **throat** figuratively to describe something people would say by using their throats to say it. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 3:13 bbq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν 1 Paul quotes David using **opened grave** figuratively to describe these people’s **throat** as if it were a deep hole containing rotting corpses. He means that the things these people say are morally corrupt and offend God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Their throats express moral corruption” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:13 pemg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul quotes David using **tongues** figuratively to describe something people would say to deceive someone by using their tongues to say it. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with what they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 3:13 d82g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 140:3](../../psa/140/03.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 3:13 b4bp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἰὸς ἀσπίδων 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **poison** that comes from **asps**, which are venomous snakes. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Asp’s poison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:13 qk16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰὸς ἀσπίδων 1 Paul quotes David using **poison of asps** figuratively to refer to what people say as if what they say contained **poison**. He means that the things they say harm people like deadly venom. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “What hurts people like a poisonous snake bite” or “Speech that hurts people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:13 u40o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul quotes David using **lips** figuratively to describe something people would say to harm someone by using their **lips** to say it. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 3:14 ucnr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ὧν τὸ στόμα ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 10:7](../../psa/10/07.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 3:14 ujjd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τὸ στόμα 1 Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s mouths in general, not of one particular **mouth**. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “mouths” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 3:14 sqr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὧν τὸ στόμα 1 Here Paul quotes David using **mouth** figuratively to describe people speaking curses and bitter things by using their **mouth** to say them. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 3:14 j0sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει 1 Paul quotes David using **cursing and bitterness** figuratively as if these concepts were thins with which people could fill or load their **mouth**. He means that these people habitually curse and say bitter things against others. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “habitually curses and says bitter things against others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:15 e67d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses 15–17 are Paul’s paraphrase of [Isaiah 59:7–8](../isa/59/07.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 3:15 vds1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἱ πόδες αὐτῶν 1 Paul quotes Isaiah using **feet**, a part of the human body, to refer to the whole person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “These people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 3:15 quph rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκχέαι αἷμα 1 Paul quotes Isaiah using **pour out blood** figuratively to refer to violently murdering people, which usually causes blood to come out of the people who are murdered. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to murder others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:16 bc96 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σύντριμμα καὶ ταλαιπωρία 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **Destruction** and **suffering**, you could express the same ideas with other expressions. Alternate translation: “They demolish lives and make people suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:16 rrgr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν 1 Here, **ways** is an idiom meaning “wherever they go” or “how they behave.” It refers to a person’s daily life. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “characterize how they behave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 3:17 zbrd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁδὸν 1 See how you translated “ways” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 3:17 jb6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁδὸν εἰρήνης 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **a way** that is characterized by **peace**. He means that these people do not understand how to live peacefully. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a peaceful way” or “a peaceful way to behave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:18 wr0x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 36:1](../../psa/36/01.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 3:18 bx27 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fear**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “They are not afraid of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:18 frt1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession φόβος Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **fear** that people should feel toward for **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “fear for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:18 m89o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 Here,**before their eyes** is an idiom that refers to thinking about something. Paul means that these people do not think at all about how terrifying God is. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 3:19 lrdp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 **Now** here indicates that what follows summarizes Paul’s teachings about **the law** and “the righteousness of God” in [verses 1–9](../03/01.md). If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:19 gc8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν 1 Here, **we** is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jews know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:19 e8h2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὅσα ὁ νόμος λέγει & λαλεῖ 1 Here Paul speaks of **the law** figuratively as if it were a person who could speak. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as many things as God says in the law, he speaks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 3:19 n399 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ νόμος & τῷ νόμῳ 1 Here Paul uses **the law** figuratively to refer to the entire Old Testament, which includes the law. Here he is not referring to only the Law of Moses, as he did earlier in the chapter. We know this because in [verses 10–18](../03/10.md) Paul quoted verses from parts of the Old Testament that are not in the Law of Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures … the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 3:19 b0g5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῖς ἐν τῷ νόμῳ 1 Paul uses **those with the law** to refer to the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated a similar phrase in [2:12](../02/12.md). Alternative translation: “to Jews” or “to those who know the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:19 end8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for what **the law says**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 3:19 cy5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πᾶν στόμα φραγῇ 1 Here, **every mouth may be shut** is an idiom that means “no one can say anything to excuse themselves.” Paul means that no one can defend themselves before God because everyone has sinned. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no human beings can excuse themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 3:19 js71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive φραγῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may stop talking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:19 w12y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche πᾶς ὁ κόσμος 1 Paul uses**all the world** figuratively to refer to **all** the people living in **the world**. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the people in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 3:19 wwq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπόδικος γένηται & τῷ Θεῷ 1 The phrase **may become accountable to God** means that God will judge everyone at the final judgment according to how they lived their lives. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God would judge all the people in the world as guilty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:20 ezbo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διότι 1 Here. **because** introduces a reason clause. Paul is stating the reason why all humanity is “accountable to God,” as stated in the previous verse. Use natural way in your language to indicate a reason clause. You may need to begin a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” or “As a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:20 vzot rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σὰρξ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will not justify any flesh” or “God will not make any flesh righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:20 xs9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche σὰρξ 1 Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to refer to a human being, who is made of flesh. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 3:20 d6vi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐξ ἔργων νόμου & διὰ & νόμου ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας 1 In this verse Paul speaks of **the law** figuratively as if it were a person who could justify someone or give them **full awareness**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires in his law … God gives full awareness of sin through his law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 3:20 w5qb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐξ ἔργων νόμου 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in [2:15](../02/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:20 i7zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns νόμου & νόμου 1 In this verse **law** is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. It does not refer to the entire Old Testament, as in the previous verse. See how you translated this use of **law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 3:20 llh9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **before him** is an idiom meaning “in his presence” or “from his perspective.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in his presence” or “before his judgment seat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 3:20 xgpp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **full awareness** and **sin**, you could express the same ideas in different way. Alternate translation: “fully aware of being sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:20 aety rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **full awareness** about the **sin** a person has committed. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “full knowledge about sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:20 jdw9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ & νόμου 1 Here, **through law** indicates the means by which a person becomes fully aware of sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:21 fqz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast νυνὶ δὲ 1 **But now** here indicates that what follows is in contrast to Paul’s discussion about **the law** in [2:1–3:20](../02/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Yet now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 3:21 y3te rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure νυνὶ δὲ χωρὶς νόμου, δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But now, the righteousness of God has been made known apart from the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 3:21 e5ky rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit νόμου & τοῦ νόμου 1 While the first occurrence of **the law** in this verse refers to the laws that God gave the Jews through Moses, the second occurrence refers to the first five books in the Old Testament that were written by Moses. The ULT shows this different by using **the law** and **the Law** respectively. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the laws God gave Israel … the part of Scripture that Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:21 nlj0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession χωρὶς νόμου 1 Here, **apart from the law** could mean: (1) **apart from** doing what **the law** requires. Alternate translation: “without having to do what the law requires” (2) outside of what **the law** says. Alternate translation: “not related to what the law says” or “differently than what the law says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:21 e4qe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has made his righteousness visible” or “God has revealed his righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:21 qkis rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:21 gvca rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Law and the Prophets bearing witness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:21 tnf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Here Paul uses **the Law and the Prophets** figuratively as if they were people who could witness or testify in a courtroom. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what God says in the Law and the Prophets is a written testimony to this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 3:21 bgyx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Paul is using the name of two parts of the Hebrew Scriptures, **the Law and the Prophets**, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 3:22 pec5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, **but** indicates that what follows explains how a person receives “the righteousness of God”. It does not indicate a contrast. Alternate translation: “namely,” or “even” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:22 cvhy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:22 q4m1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διὰ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **faith in Jesus Christ** is a possessive form that indicates **faith** that is associated with **Jesus Christ**. This could refer to: (1) trust in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “by trusting in Jesus Christ” or “by believing in Jesus Christ” (2) the faithfulness of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “through the faithfulness that Jesus Christ possesses” or “through how faithful Jesus Christ is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:22 c4mg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τοὺς πιστεύοντας 1 Paul is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “those who believe in him” or “those who believe in Jesus for salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 3:22 o6qe rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Here, **for** introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why **the righteousness of God** is **for all those who believe**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:22 daa3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐ & ἐστιν διαστολή 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **distinction**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “God does not discriminate” or “God is not partial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:23 x1hu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why “there is no distinction,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something is true. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:23 akn9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντες 1 Here Paul uses the adjective **all** as a noun that refers to **all** the people who have existed or will exist. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 3:23 jbe9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑστεροῦνται τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **all** people as if they were something that fails to reach its destination. He means that they lack or do not attain **the glory of God**. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “lack the glory of God” or “fail to attain the glory of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:23 vwsf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the possessive form **the glory of God** could refer to: (1) the glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned. Alternate translation: “the glory God once gave them” or “the glory from God” (2) glorifying God, as in the similar phrase “the glory of the imperishable God” in [1:23](../01/23.md). Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:24 ibi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι 1 Here, **grace** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could **justify** someone. Paul means that God graciously makes people righteous as a gift. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and are gifted with becoming righteous because God is gracious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 3:24 evs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν 1 Paul assumes that his readers know that those who are **being justified freely** are “all” those who “have sinned” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all people are being freely justified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:24 jgcu δωρεὰν 1 Alternate translation: “as a gift” or “without payment” 3:24 atij rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι, διὰ τῆς ἀπολυτρώσεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **redemption**, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “by God being gracious through redeeming them in Christ Jesus” or “due to how kind God is, because Christ Jesus redeemed them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:24 hyeb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπολυτρώσεως 1 The word translated as **redemption** refers to rescuing someone from captivity by paying a ransom. Your language may require you to indicate what the people are redeemed from. This could mean: (1) Jesus redeems people from eternal punishment. Alternative translation: “redemption from eternal punishment” (2) Jesus redeems people from being enslaved to sin. Alternative translation: “redemption from enslavement to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:24 lno6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, Paul speaks figuratively of **redemption** as if it were an object that could be inside Jesus. Paul means that God redeemed all people who believe in Jesus by uniting them to **Christ Jesus**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that comes through union with Christ Jesus” or “that is through being united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:25 ci0v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃν προέθετο ὁ Θεὸς ἱλαστήριον 1 Here Paul uses **presented** figuratively as if Jesus were an Old Testament atonement sacrifice that was **presented** to God in the temple. He means that Jesus’ death was a sacrifice for the sins of humankind. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “whom God offered to atone for the sins of humanity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:25 t2d8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἱλαστήριον, διὰ πίστεως & εἰς ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **propitiation**, **faith**, **demonstration**, or **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “to atone for people’s sins by trusting … to demonstrate how he makes people righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:25 m159 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ αἵματι 1 Here Paul uses **his blood** figuratively to refer to Jesus’ death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in Christ’s death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 3:25 ieq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ἔνδειξιν 1 Here, **for** indicates that the phrase that follows is the purpose for which God **presented** Jesus as **a propitiation**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to demonstrate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 3:25 ze9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ 1 See how you translated “the righteousness of God” in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:25 siri rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **overlooking**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “because he overlooked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:25 ydoj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῶν προγεγονότων ἁμαρτημάτων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin**, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “how they had sinned previously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:26 b2f6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν 1 Here, **in** introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason for God “overlooking of the sins that happened previously,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the reason why something is true. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:26 lm1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **forbearance**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “because God is so forbearing” or “since God forbears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:26 cg55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **God** who is characterized by **forbearance**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in God’s forbearance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:26 b1xa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πρὸς τὴν ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:26 v1c9 ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ 1 Alternate translation: “at this time in history” or “currently” 3:26 jjwq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν 1 Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God now demonstrates **his righteousness**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that he would be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 3:26 x6cf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul is speaking of all people who have **faith in Jesus**, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “anyone who is from faith in Jesus” or “every person who trusts in Jesus”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 3:26 qdkw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ 1 Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who is characterized by **faith in Jesus**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who is characterized by faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:26 ab0w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πίστεως Ἰησοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 22](../03/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:27 emwi Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIn [verses 27–31](../03/27.md) Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions and answers in order to emphasize that God alone makes people righteous through faith in Jesus. Like in [verses 1–9](../03/01.md), Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew when he asks the rhetorical questions, but he is speaking as himself when he answers those questions. 3:27 e0wc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in [verses 21–26](../03/21.md). If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If it is God who makes people righteous through faith in Jesus, then where is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:27 fjm4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις? 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question here to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in [verses 21–26](../03/21.md). If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There then is no grounds for boasting!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 3:27 mvs0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **boasting** as if it were an object that could be in a location. He means that no one can boast because only God makes people righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Then can anyone boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:27 pub7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **boasting**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “Who then can boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:27 px29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξεκλείσθη 1 In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical question in the previous sentence. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘It is excluded!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:27 eufl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξεκλείσθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has excluded it” or “God does not allow it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:27 v3ut rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων? & διὰ νόμου πίστεως 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Through what kind of law is a person made righteous? Is a person made righteous through the works of the law? … a person made righteous through a law of faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 3:27 dpny rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων? 1 In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous sentence and in [verses 21–26](../03/21.md). If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely through a kind of law! Surely through the works!” or “Surely a person is made righteous through a kind of law! Surely a person is made righteous through works!”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 3:27 bgyy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῶν ἔργων? 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **law** that is characterized by **works**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Through a law characterized by works?” or “By doing what the law requires?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:27 h9wb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐχί, ἀλλὰ διὰ νόμου πίστεως 1 In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘No! But through a law of faith.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:27 tg79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations οὐχί 1 **No!** is an exclamation that communicates a strong contrast to the previous statement. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Not at all!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 3:27 ynz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διὰ νόμου πίστεως 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **law** that is characterized by **faith**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “through a law characterized by faith” or “by doing what faith requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:27 mlcq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “of trusting in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:28 qe9p rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows explains what “the law of faith” means in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:28 jtqq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive λογιζόμεθα 1 Here, **we** is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Christian Jews, as indicated in [verse 9](../03/09.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we believing Jews consider” or “we believing Jews regard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:28 t8um rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in the generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “humankind” or “a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 3:28 ph88 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δικαιοῦσθαι & ἄνθρωπον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “that God justifies a man” or “that God makes a man righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 3:28 jb14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “by believing in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 3:28 s747 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession χωρὶς ἔργων νόμου 1 See how you translated “apart from the law” in [verse 21](../03/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:28 ycx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἔργων νόμου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to refer to **the works** that God requires in **the law**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the works that the law requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:29 hdbq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ 1 **Or** here indicates that the next two sentences are the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Or you Jews might say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:29 ineu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν? ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Is he not also God of Gentiles? Yes, he is also God of Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 3:29 m8eo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐθνῶν & ἐθνῶν 1 See how you translated this word in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:29 ch7p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion Ἰουδαίων ὁ Θεὸς μόνον? οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν? 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God is surely not only the God of Jews! He is surely also the God of Gentiles!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 3:29 rq5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν 1 In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Yes, also of Gentiles’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:29 gp74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ναὶ 1 **Yes** is an exclamation word that communicates enthusiasm. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating enthusiasm. Alternate translation (change the period to an exclamation point): “Of course!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 3:30 vur7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴπερ 1 Paul uses **if** as if the rest of the verse were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since we know” or “Because it is true that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 3:30 qdiu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἴπερ 1 This phrase introduces the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that God is also the God of the Gentiles. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “since, indeed” or “we know this is true because, indeed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 3:30 ux30 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἷς ὁ Θεός 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **God** as if he were a number. He means that **God** is the **one** and only true **God** for both Jews and Gentiles. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “there is only one God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 3:30 rjxp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ὃς δικαιώσει περιτομὴν ἐκ πίστεως, καὶ ἀκροβυστίαν διὰ τῆς πίστεως 1 This phrase gives us further information about **who** **God** is. It is not making a distinction between the one true **God** and false gods. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is the one who will justify the circumcision by faith, and the uncircumcision through the same faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 3:30 kw62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns περιτομὴν & ἀκροβυστίαν 1 The words **circumcision** and **uncircumcision** are singular nouns that refers to groups of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the circumcised people … the uncircumcised people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 3:30 gk5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy περιτομὴν & ἀκροβυστίαν 1 Here Paul uses **the circumcision** figuratively to refer to the Jews by associating them with **circumcision**, and he uses **the uncircumcision** figuratively to refer to the Gentiles by associating them with **uncircumcision**. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people … the non-Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 3:30 s9i4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐκ πίστεως & διὰ τῆς πίστεως 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 26](../03/26.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:31 vj40 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν 1 Here, **then** indicates that this sentence is the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then you Jews might say, ‘Do we nullify the law’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 3:31 y6qx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν διὰ τῆς πίστεως 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express the response that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we surely nullify the law through the same faith!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 3:31 nzr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οὖν καταργοῦμεν 1 Here, **we** is used exclusively to speak of the unbelieving Jews whom Paul is speaking on behalf of. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Do we Jews then nullify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:31 cw0k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν 1 Here, **nullify the law** means to make **the law** useless or no longer applicable to anyone. Paul is stating that the Jews might worry that he is teaching that the Law of Moses does not have any function at all because God makes people righteous by faith. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do we make the law useless” or “Do we throw away the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:31 aj6s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διὰ τῆς πίστεως 1 See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 3:31 pjgc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ γένοιτο! ἀλλὰ νόμον ἱστάνομεν 1 In these two sentences Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous sentence. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be! Instead, we establish the law’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3:31 rhy5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations μὴ γένοιτο 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 6](../03/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 3:31 ppvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive νόμον ἱστάνομεν 1 Here, **we** is used exclusively to refer to Paul and other Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Christians uphold the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 3:31 c295 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor νόμον ἱστάνομεν 1 Paul uses **uphold** figuratively to refer to **the law** as if it were an object that people could hold up high. The meaning of **uphold** here is the opposite meaning of **nullify** earlier in the verse. It could mean: (1) Christians fulfill the requirements of the law by trusting in Jesus, who fulfilled the law for them. Alternate translation: “we fulfill the law by faith” (2) Christians value **the law** and affirm that it is useful. Alternative translation: “we confirm that the law is useful” or “we affirm that the law has value”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:intro f9jc 0 # Romans 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n4. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)\n * God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26)\n * No one can boast in works (3:27–31)\n * The examples of Abraham and David (4:1–25)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with [verses 7–8](../04/07.md) of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The purpose of the law of Moses\n\nIn this chapter Paul continues to develop his argument based on what he wrote in the previous chapter. He explains how God made Abraham, the ancestor of all Jews, righteous a long time before God gave the Jews the Law of Moses. Even Abraham could not become righteous by what he did. Rather, God made Abraham righteous on the basis of Abraham’s faith. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person righteous. People have always become righteous only by faith. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n### Circumcision\n\nCircumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, being circumcised never made anyone righteous. In this chapter Paul uses “circumcision” to refer to Jews and “uncircumcision” to refer to non-Jews. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nIn [verses 1](../04/01.md), [3](../04/03.md), and [9–10](../04/09.md) Paul continues using rhetorical questions like he did in the previous chapter. He does this in order to answer objections that Jews might make about what he is saying. 4:1 q7wc Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\n[Verses 1–12](../04/01.md) are a series of rhetorical questions and answers that Paul uses to emphasize that even **Abraham**, the ancestor of the Jewish people, was made righteous by God “through faith.” 4:1 gxv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τί οὖν 1 Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in [3:27–31](../03/27.md). See how you translated **What then** in [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:1 gw29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα? 1 In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in [3:27–31](../03/27.md). If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that Abraham, our forefather according to the flesh, has surely discovered something!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 4:1 rhrp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα? 1 In this verse and the first part of the next verse, Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 4:1 s4b5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐροῦμεν 1 In [verses 1–9](../04/01.md) Paul uses **we** exclusively to speak of himself and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “will we Jews say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 4:1 ot88 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “that Abraham has discovered, who is our forefather according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 4:1 fk5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα 1 See how you translated **according to the flesh** in [1:3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 4:2 pmua rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks εἰ γὰρ Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα 1 These clauses continue the the statements that a Jew might have to against Paul that began in the previous verse. You may need to indicate this with a closing quotation mark at the end of these clauses or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 4:2 ka9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows is a the reason for the statement in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This must be the case because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:2 oe12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that the unbelieving Jew might think that this is actually true. In Paul’s time some Jewish teachers taught that Abraham had a right to boast because of his faith. However, since translating this as if it were true might confuse your readers, it is best to use a hypothetical sentence, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 4:2 wvmh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Ἀβραὰμ & ἐδικαιώθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God justified Abraham” or “God made Abraham right with himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:2 sibe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξ ἔργων 1 Paul assumes that his readers would understand that **works**means “works of the law” as in [3:28](../03/28.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires from his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:2 mefy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν 1 In this clause Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous clauses and previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘But not before God!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:2 me3d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν. 1 What follows the word **but** here is an emphatic contrast to what was just stated. Paul is negating the argument that he presented earlier in this verse and in the previous verse. You could make this emphasis explicit by replacing the period with an exclamation point or another natural way in your language for introducing am emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but certainly not before God!” or “however not from God’s perspective!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 4:2 z9wx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πρὸς Θεόν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **Abraham** as if he were located in the presence of **God**. He means that Abraham could not **boast** to God about his **righteousness** if it was **righteous by works**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “from God’s perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:3 w9i5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse is the reason why Paul said in the previous verse that Abraham cannot boast “before God.” Use a natural way in your language to introduce a reason clause. Alternative translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:3 hih3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the scripture surely says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 4:3 g1wz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει 1 Here Paul uses **say** figuratively as if **the scripture** were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information related to the topic he is discussing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what information is in the scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 4:3 r9te rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει? 1 Here Paul uses **what does the scripture say** to indicate a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 15:6](gen/15/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what is written in the scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 4:3 xdtx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ Γραφὴ 1 Here, **the scripture** refers specifically to the quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../../gen/15/06.md) that follows in this verse. It does not refer to the Scriptures in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the scripture that Moses wrote in Genesis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:3 smc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God counted it to him as righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:3 az65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐλογίσθη 1 The pronoun **it** refers to Abraham’s faith, which was implied by the statement that **Abraham believed God**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his faith was counted” or “his trust in God was counted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 4:3 qked rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form or another way. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:4 ihul rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 **Now** here indicates that what follows in verses 4–5 is an explanation of the scripture quotation in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 4:4 oojx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τῷ & ἐργαζομένῳ 1 Here, **the one who works** refers to a hypothetical person who obeys the laws God gave through Moses and is “made righteous by works” (see [verse 2](../04/02.md)). However, since the meaning of verses 4–5 is given in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 4:4 dsl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ μισθὸς οὐ λογίζεται κατὰ χάριν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he does not consider his wage as grace” or “he does not regard his pay as grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:4 xo4x κατὰ χάριν & κατὰ ὀφείλημα 1 Alternate translation: “as a matter of grace … as a matter of obligation” or “as a gift … as an obligation” 4:4 ossx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ χάριν & κατὰ ὀφείλημα 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **grace** and **obligation**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “as what is gracious … as what is owed” or “something gifted … something owed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:5 ynp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 **Now** here indicates that what follows in this verse is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. Use natural way in your language to express contrasting ideas. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 4:5 j3ir rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ & μὴ ἐργαζομένῳ 1 Here, **the one who does not work** refers to a person who does not obey the laws God gave through Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the one who is does not obey God’s laws” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:5 fezj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν δικαιοῦντα 1 Here, **the one who makes righteous** refers to God. If this would your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who justifies” or “God who makes righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:5 tovp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸν ἀσεβῆ 1 Paul is using the singular adjective phrase **the ungodly** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are ungodly” or “people who do ungodly things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 4:5 va3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λογίζεται ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 3](../04/03.md). Alternate translation: “God counted his faith as righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:5 s00l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith** and **righteousness**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “how he trusts … as being righteous” or “how he trusts in God … as being right with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:6 hil6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καὶ Δαυεὶδ λέγει 1 Paul uses **David also speaks of** here to introduce a scripture quotation from [Psalm 31:1–2](../psa/031/001.md), which King David wrote. This occurs in [verses 7–8](../04/07.md). If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “David also wrote in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 4:6 s0v1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blessedness**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how blessed the man is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:6 vyse rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the man** that is characterized by **blessedness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the blessed man” or “the happy man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:6 x40j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 Paul is speaking of people in general, not of one particular **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 4:6 c6zs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ᾧ ὁ Θεὸς λογίζεται δικαιοσύνην χωρὶς ἔργων 1 This phrase gives us further information about the **the man**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the man God counts as righteous apart from works” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 4:6 lilj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:6 o260 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession χωρὶς ἔργων 1 See how you translated this phrase in [3:28](../03/28.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:7 zqwl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 This verse is the beginning of a quotation from [Psalm 31:1–2](../../psa/031/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 4:7 dur6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how **Blessed** these people are. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “How blessed are those people whom God forgives completely for all their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 4:7 lq4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὧν & αἱ ἀνομίαι & ὧν & αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **lawless deeds** and **sins**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless things they have done … the sins they have committed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:7 d4f4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀφέθησαν & ἐπεκαλύφθησαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God forgives … God covers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:7 hj2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 Paul quotes David leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “blessed are those whose sins have been covered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 4:7 hqfm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπεκαλύφθησαν 1 Paul quotes David using **covered** figuratively to refer to God forgiving sins as if he covers sins so that he no longer sees them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:8 jjov rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν 1 The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from [Psalm 31:1–2](../../psa/031/001.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 4:8 yox7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν 1 This verse means the same thing as the two clauses in the previous verse. Paul the same thing here, in a slightly different way, to emphasize how **Blessed** people are home God forgives for their sins. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “How truly blessed is a man whose sin the Lord does certainly not count!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 4:8 kpfe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ἀνὴρ 1 Paul quotes David speaking of people in general, not of one particular **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 4:8 y21b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “sinful deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:8 jdrm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ μὴ λογίσηται 1 Paul quotes David using **count** figuratively to refer to God remembering or regarding people’s sins after he has forgiven them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does certainly not regard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:8 yxh2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ 1 The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. Paul quotes David using them together to emphasize how certain it is that God does not regard people’s sin after he has forgiven them. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “never” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 4:9 qtgb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Then** here introduces a result clause. This verse indicates the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in [verses 6–8](../04/06.md). Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “As a result,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:9 g4f6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν, ἢ καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν? 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “this blessedness is surely upon the circumcision and also upon the uncircumcision!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 4:9 alrb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος 1 Here, **this blessedness** refers to joyful state of those people whom God forgives and makes righteous, as mentioned in [verses 6–8](../04/06.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “is this blessed state of being forgiven by God” or “is this blessed forgiveness from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:9 jmym rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν & ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν 1 Paul speaks of **blessedness** figuratively as if it were an object that could be put **upon** someone. He means that both circumcised and uncircumcised people can receive the blessing of forgiveness from God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is this blessedness given to the circumcision … to the uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:9 dn7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns τὴν περιτομὴν & τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν 1 See how you translated these words in [3:30](../03/30.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 4:9 mrsm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows answers the rhetorical question. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 4:9 w2xt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive λέγομεν 1 Here Paul uses **we** exclusively to refer to Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jewish people say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 4:9 o51f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγομεν 1 Paul uses **we say** here to introduce a modified scripture quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../../gen/15/06.md), which Moses wrote. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “we say what Moses wrote in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 4:9 m3uh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐλογίσθη τῷ Ἀβραὰμ ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην 1 See how you translated the similar clauses in [verses 3](../04/03.md) and [5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:10 trz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη? ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? 1 In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to emphasize that Abraham was made righteous without being circumcised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. You may need to combine these sentences. Alternate translation: “Then you surely know how it was counted to him! You surely know whether it was in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” or “Then you surely know how it was counted to him, whether in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 4:10 unuf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result πῶς οὖν 1 Here, **then** introduces a result clause that is in the form of a rhetorical question. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “How as a result” or “So then how” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:10 uj5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πῶς 1 **How** here means “in what circumstances.” Paul is not asking how God made Abraham righteous, but is asking whether or not Abraham was circumcised when God made him righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In what circumstances” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 4:10 bw38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐλογίσθη & οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ 1 In this verse the pronoun **it** refers to Abraham’s faith, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was Abraham’s faith counted … His faith was not in circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 4:10 p5rp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “How then did God count it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:10 wbta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ 1 Here Paul is leaving out some the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Was it counted being in circumcision, or in uncircumcision? It was not counted in circumcision, but in uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 4:10 zj6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision** and **uncircumcision**, you could express the same ideas in verbal way. Paul implies that Abraham is the subject of these sentences. Alternate translation: “While Abraham was circumcised, or while he was uncircumcised? It was not while he was circumcised, but while he was uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:11 unmg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns περιτομῆς & ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ & δι’ ἀκροβυστίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **circumcision** and **uncircumcision**, you could express the same ideas in verbal way. Alternate translation: “of being circumcised … while being uncircumcised … through being uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:11 d564 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession σημεῖον & περιτομῆς 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the sign** that is **circumcision**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the sign that is circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:11 rjhr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ 1 This phrase gives us further information about **the sign of circumcision**. Circumcision is not only a **sign**, but also a **seal**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these clauses clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, a seal of the righteousness of the faith that he had in his uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 4:11 wm54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **a seal** that proves **the righteousness** to be real. If this is not clear in your language, you could indicate this with a different form. Alternate translation: “a seal that proves the righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:11 n31z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **righteousness** that comes from **faith**. If this is not clear in your language, you could indicate this with an adjective phrase or a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of the righteousness from faith” or “of being right with God that comes from trusting in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:11 zlwg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ 1 This clause gives us further information about **the faith** that Abraham had. Paul is referring to **the faith** that Abraham had before he was circumcised. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that Abraham had in his uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 4:11 mob7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **uncircumcision** as if it were a location someone could be **in**. He means that Abraham was in the state of being uncircumcised. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while he was uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:11 f5vv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν 1 Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God required Abraham to become circumcised. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that he would be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 4:11 ue6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πατέρα πάντων τῶν πιστευόντων δι’ ἀκροβυστίας 1 Paul uses **father** figuratively to refer to Abraham as if he physically produced **those who believe** in God. Paul means that Abraham spiritually represents all uncircumcised non-Jews who trust in God. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of all those who believe through uncircumcision” or “like the father of all those who believe through uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:11 etyl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ ἀκροβυστίας 1 Here the word translated as **through** refers to a going through a time period. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “during uncircumcision” or “throughout the time they were uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:11 hm61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην 1 Here, **so that** indicates that this clause could refer to: (1) the purpose of Abraham being **the father of all those who believe**. Alternate translation: “in order that the righteousness would be counted to them” (2) the result of Abraham being **the father of all those who believe**. Alternate translation: “resulting in the righteousness being counted to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 4:11 y88e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην 1 See how you translated **counted** in [verses 3–5](../04/03.md) and [9–10](../04/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:11 ehib rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν δικαιοσύνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:12 v9bu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ πατέρα περιτομῆς 1 Here, **and** indicates that what follows is another purpose for God commanding Abraham to be circumcised after he trusted in God. If it would be clearer in your language, you could repeat some of the information from the previous sentence and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “and also so that he would be the father of circumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 4:12 u8j3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πατέρα περιτομῆς & τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 Paul uses **father of circumcision** here figuratively. He means that Abraham is both the physical ancestor and spiritual ancestor of Jewish people who are both physically circumcised and have the “circumcision of the heart,” which Paul refers to in [2:29](../02/29.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spiritual representative of those who are physically and spiritually circumcised … our spiritual representative” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:12 krkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῖς οὐκ ἐκ περιτομῆς μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ 1 Paul assumes that his readers will know that these two clauses refer to those Jews who are **not only** circumcised in their bodies, but also have the same **faith** in God that Abraham had before he was circumcised. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those Jews who are not only circumcised, but who also follow in the steps of the faith of our father Abraham in uncircumcision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:12 s9jt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς & πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ 1 Here, **follow in the steps** is an idiom that means to follow someone’s example. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who follow the example of the faith of our father Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 4:12 btrd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς & πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the faith** that **our father Abraham** had. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of our father Abraham’s faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:12 u5ur rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ 1 Here, **our** refers to Paul and his fellow believing Jews, as in [3:9](../03/09.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of our Jewish father Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 4:12 ykdc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ 1 Here, **in uncircumcision** has the same meaning as “through circumcision” stated in the previous verse. See how you translated the phrase there. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:13 i6xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here gives the reason why Abraham is the spiritual “father” of both non-Jews and Jews, as stated in [verses 11–12](../04/11.md). If it would be clearer to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:13 e0a3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐπαγγελία & τὸ κληρονόμον αὐτὸν εἶναι 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **promise** and **heir**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God promised … that he would inherit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:13 yqxx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ 1 Here, the world translated **or** indicates that **the promise** is **to Abraham** and **his seed**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 4:13 ew13 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ 1 Here Paul uses **seed** figuratively to refer to “offspring.” Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to his descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:13 ct1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche κόσμου 1 Here **the world** could refer to: (1) all the land of **the world**. Although God had promised to give the land of Canaan to Abraham’s descendants, the Jews in Paul’s time understood that this promise included the whole earth. This will indeed take place when Jesus, a descendent of Abraham, rules over the whole world. Alternate expression: “of all the land in the world” (2) the people who live in the world, as in [3:19](../03/19.md). Alternate translation: “of the people who live in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 4:13 pjyt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ & διὰ νόμου & ἀλλὰ διὰ δικαιοσύνης 1 Here the word translated as **through** indicates the means by which God gave ** the promise**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was not by means of the law but by means of the righteousness” or “was not on the basis of the law but on the basis of the righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:13 kquo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit νόμου 1 See how you translated **the law** in [3:21](../03/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:13 iqsm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δικαιοσύνης πίστεως 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 11](../04/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:14 hba4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that [verses 14–15](../04/14.md) give the reasons why God’s promise to Abraham was given “through the righteousness of faith” and not “through the law,” as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:14 n0x6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo εἰ & οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι, κεκένωται ἡ πίστις 1 Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the serious implications of how people inherit God’s promises. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose the heirs are from the law, then the faith has been emptied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 4:14 ksui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι & ἡ πίστις & ἡ ἐπαγγελία 1 See how you translated “heir”, **the law**, and **faith** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:14 k4ip rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κληρονόμοι 1 Here, **heirs** refers to “Abraham” and “his seed” from the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs, Abraham or his seed, are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:14 w977 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι 1 Here, **from the law** refers to those who try to obey the Law of Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs are those who try to obey the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:14 hxvd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κεκένωται ἡ πίστις 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **faith** as if it were a container that could be emptied. He means that **faith** would become powerless or useless to make a person righteous if simply obeying**the law** allows a person to inherit God’s promises. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “then it would be impossible to become righteous by trusting in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:15 v1ow rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** indicates that the rest of the verse gives the reason why inheriting God’s promise by obeying the law would nullify faith and the promise, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:15 qma4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ & νόμος ὀργὴν κατεργάζεται 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the law** as if it were a person who could produce something. He means that the **law** causes God to punish people because they cannot obey it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the law results in wrath for those who do not obey it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 4:15 h1x1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὀργὴν 1 See how you translated the same use of this word in [1:18](../01/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 4:15 px0m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὗ δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν νόμος, οὐδὲ παράβασις 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the law** and **transgression** as if they were located in a specific place. Here, **where** means that God’s law exists. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “but where the law is not present, neither is transgression present” or “but in a place where God’s law does not exist, transgression also does not exist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:15 t0wx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns παράβασις 1 See how you translated the same use of this word in [2:23](../02/23.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:16 defl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ἐκ πίστεως 1 Here, **it** refers to **the promise** mentioned later in the verse and introduced in [verse 13](../04/13.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise is by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 4:16 nchm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ πίστεως 1 Here, **by** indicates the means by which someone acquires **the promise**. If this is not clear in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person acquires God’s promise by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:16 bc5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God makes **faith** the means for acquiring **the promise**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 4:16 fvax κατὰ χάριν 1 Alternate translation: “by grace” or “on the basis of grace” 4:16 cgpq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάριν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how gracious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:16 v8it rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ εἶναι βεβαίαν, τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν 1 Here, **so that** could indicate: (1) a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for the promise to be certain” (2) a result clause. Alternate translation: “with the result that the promise might be certain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 4:16 qalp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν 1 See how you translated this word in [verse 13](../04/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:16 r8ji rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι 1 The phrase **all the seed** is singular but refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “all the descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 4:16 xzsp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι 1 See how you translated **seed** in [4:13](../04/13.md).(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:16 a4ai rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish οὐ τῷ ἐκ τοῦ νόμου μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῷ ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ 1 These clauses give us further information about the phrase **all the seed**. They distinguish between a **seed** associated with **the law** and a **seed** associated with **the faith**. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “both from those believers associated with Abraham through the law, and those associated with the faith of Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 4:16 ns6r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ τοῦ νόμου 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 14](../04/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:16 qctv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ 1 Here, **from the faith of Abraham** refers to those who trust in God the way Abraham did. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who has the same faith as Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:16 welr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅς ἐστιν πατὴρ πάντων ἡμῶν 1 Paul uses **father** figuratively to refer to Abraham as if he physically produced all human beings. Paul means that Abraham is the physical ancestor of all believing Jews and the spiritual ancestor of all believing non-Jews. If your readers would not understand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who spiritually represents all of us who believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:16 kd6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive πάντων ἡμῶν 1 Here, **us all** refers to **all the seed** and so is inclusive of all believing Jews and non-Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of all believers in God” or “of all of us who trust in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 4:17 nuj8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καθὼς γέγραπται, ὅτι πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε 1 Here Paul interrupts the sentence he began in the previous verse and inserts these two clauses in order to support his argument. If this would confuse your readers, you could mark these clauses in a way that shows they are inserted into the middle of a sentence, as in the UST. You could also move these clauses to the end of the verse so that they do not divide the main sentence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 4:17 ibwm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Here Paul uses a quotation from the Old Testament in order to support the statement in the previous verse that Abraham “is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make the relationship between this verse and the previous verse clearer. Alternate translation: “The fact that Abraham is the father of us all is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:17 iju4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Here Paul uses **just as it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 17:5](../../gen/17/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 4:17 sjm0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by Moses. Alternate translation: “just as Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:17 peaf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε 1 In this clause Paul quotes [Genesis 17:5](../../gen/17/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 4:17 mxm5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τέθεικά σε & ἐπίστευσεν 1 The pronoun **I** refers to **God**, and **you** and **he** refer to Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, have appointed you, Abraham, as … Abraham trusted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 4:17 n6l7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν 1 Paul quotes God using **father** figuratively to refer to Abraham as if he were going to physically produce children who would comprise **many nations**. God means that Abraham would become the spiritual ancestor of a large amount of people from **many nations** who trust in God like Abraham. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of numerous groups of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:17 ph37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν Θεοῦ, 1 Here Paul continues the sentence from the previous verse that he had interrupted with the first two clauses in this verse. This clause completes the previous statement from the previous verse, “who is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. You made need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Abraham is the father of us all in the presence of God whom he trusted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:17 ifwu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατέναντι & Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses **in the presence of** figuratively to refer to Abraham as if he were physically present with **God**. Paul means that **God** personally considers Abraham to represent the believers that come from **many nations**. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to what God thinks” or “in God’s view” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:17 s67j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish οὗ ἐπίστευσεν & τοῦ ζῳοποιοῦντος τοὺς νεκροὺς, καὶ καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα 1 These clauses give further information about **God**. If this might confuse your readers, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer by making new sentences or by another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is the God whom he trusted. It is this God who makes the dead live and calls the things not existing as existing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 4:17 tg2e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the things not existing** as if **God** were calling to them. Paul means that **God** creates things by commanding them to exist, as Moses describes in [Genesis 1:3–27](../gen/01/03.md). If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “summons into being things that did not previously exist” or “by speaking creates things that did not previously exist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:18 emih rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃς & αὐτὸν & σου 1 The pronouns **who** and **he** and **your** refer to Abraham, not God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 4:18 g8fm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν 1 Here, **against hope** is an idiom meaning “what seems hopeless.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “although it seemed hopeless, he believed on the basis of hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 4:18 auah rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “who hopefully believed although it seemed hopeless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:18 n62i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐπίστευσεν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believed in God” or “believed what God had promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 4:18 bs6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι αὐτὸν 1 Here, **so that** indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the result of Abraham believing **on the basis of hope**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “which resulted in him becoming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:18 qbdq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 17](../04/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:18 b92q rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations τὸ εἰρημένον 1 Here Paul uses **what was said** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Genesis 15:5](../../gen/15/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what was said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 4:18 cryi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ εἰρημένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was spoken by God. Alternate translation: “what God said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:18 p5el rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὕτως ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα σου 1 Paul assumes that his readers would know the rest of what God said in the verse he is quoting ([Genesis 15:5](../../gen/15/05.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Look now at the heavens and count the stars, if you are able to count them. So will your seed be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:18 i2ev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ σπέρμα 1 See how you translated **seed** in [verse 16](../04/16.md).(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:19 ycte rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει, κατενόησεν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα ἤδη νενεκρωμένον, ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων, καὶ τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “He considered his own body as already having died (being about a hundred years old)—and the deadness of the womb of Sarah—but he was not weakening in the faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 4:19 m9gq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει 1 Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “And being strengthened in the faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 4:19 s6u1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει 1 Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham’s faith as if it were something that a person could be **weakening in**. He means that Abraham kept trusting God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not ceasing to trust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:19 b3w6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ πίστει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “in how he trusted God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:19 bn9k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἤδη νενεκρωμένον 1 Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham as if he actually thought his body was **dead**. Paul means that Abraham knew he was too old to produce a child. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “unable to father a child” or “useless for procreating” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:19 bfsr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων 1 Here Paul provides background information about Abraham’s age to help his readers understand why Abraham **considered his own body as already being dead**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “since he was about one hundred years old” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) 4:19 hro2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας 1 Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “he also considered the deadness of the womb of Sarah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 4:19 ghhm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **deadness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that the womb of Sarah was dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:19 qil5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας 1 Paul speaks figuratively of Sarah’s **womb** as if it were dead. He means that she was unable to conceive children. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “how Sarah was unable to conceive” or “that Sarah could not bear children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:19 yx92 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας 1 Paul assumes that his readers would know that Sarah had been unable to become pregnant throughout her life, as described in the Old Testament book of Genesis. This fact makes Abraham’s faith even more amazing. If your readers would be unfamiliar with the story of Abraham and Sarah, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, since she could never become pregnant before” or “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, which had always been dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:20 qn5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εἰς δὲ τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not waver in unbelief about what God promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 4:20 kicf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 **But** here indicates that what follows emphasizes Abraham’s **faith** in **the promise of God**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 4:20 o3zu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς & τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The word translated as **toward** could also mean “with regard to” or “regarding.” If it might be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with regard to the promise of God” or “regarding the promise of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:20 qcod rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the promise** that comes from **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the promise that came from God” or “the promise from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 4:20 wgmc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **promise**, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “the things God promised” or “the things God said would happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:20 ep2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ 1 Here, **did not waver** and **unbelief** form a double negative expression. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he did not waver in belief” or “his belief did not waver” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 4:20 th2x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ & τῇ πίστει 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **the unbelief** and **the faith**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “by distrusting … by trusting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:20 zdj5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God strengthened him in the faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:20 a4g4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει 1 Paul speaks figuratively of Abraham’s **faith** as if it were something that a person could be **strengthened in**. He means that God enabled Abraham to continue trusting him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was enabled to keep on trusting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:20 ew3r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δοὺς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “having glorified God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:21 y2sh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πληροφορηθεὶς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God fully convinced him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:21 plbf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπήγγελται & ἐστιν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to God, not Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God had promised, God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 4:21 j12r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃ ἐπήγγελται 1 Here, **what he had promised** refers to the promise Paul describes in [verse 13](../04/13.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things God promised to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 4:22 ympp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ καὶ 1 Here, **therefore** introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “And for this reason” or “And this is the reason why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:22 wlnh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην 1 This clause is a quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../../gen/15/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 4:22 i56a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην 1 See how you translated this in [verse 3](../04/03.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:23 zdc0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐκ ἐγράφη & δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον, ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases and combine them. Alternate translation: “Now the phrase ‘it was counted to him,’ was not written only for his sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 4:23 r65c rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν & αὐτῷ 1 The pronouns **his** and **him** refer to Abraham. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s … to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 4:23 bfiw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐκ ἐγράφη & δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Moses wrote the quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses did not write it only for Abraham’s sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:23 bmlm δι’ αὐτὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for him” or “regarding him” 4:23 ae1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ, 1 This clause is a quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../../gen/15/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 4:23 jft0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ 1 See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:24 pfc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 Here, **our** and **whom** refer to all **those who believe** in **Jesus**. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “for the sake us believers who are about to be counted, to we who believe in the one who raised from the dead ones Jesus, the Lord of us all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 4:24 ffdm δι’ ἡμᾶς 1 See how you translated “for his sake” in the previous verse. 4:24 nh4k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “to whom God is about to count it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:24 bu1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns μέλλει 1 Here the pronoun **it** refers to the “faith” mentioned in [verses 5](../04/05) and [20](../04/20). Previously **it** referred to Abraham’s faith, but in this verse **it** refers to **our** faith. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “our faith is about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 4:24 mujr λογίζεσθαι 1 See how you translated **counted** in the previous verse. 4:24 artt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 This clause refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who raised Jesus our Lord from the dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 4:24 i6vl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν 1 Here, **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused Jesus our Lord to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 4:24 iq69 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 Here, the phrase translated **the dead ones** refers to dead people. Here it means that Jesus physically died and was buried. If your language has a word or phrase for the place that dead people go, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “from the place where dead people are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 4:25 irue rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃς & ἡμῶν & τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν 1 Here the pronoun **who** refers to Jesus, and **our** refers to all “those who believe” in him, as mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus … we believers’ … the justification of us believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 4:25 cca1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὃς παρεδόθη & ἠγέρθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up … God raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 4:25 b999 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃς παρεδόθη 1 Paul speaks figuratively of Jesus as if he were a thing that could be **given up** to another person. Paul means that God allowed people to arrest and kill Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who was allowed to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 4:25 op41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν & διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **trespasses** and **justification**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because we trespassed … to make us righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 4:25 imvc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul uses **for the sake of** differently than he did in [verses 23–24](../04/23.md). Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate the reason why Jesus **was given up**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of our trespasses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 4:25 gmbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἠγέρθη 1 See how you translated **raised** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 4:25 hzop rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul uses **for the sake of** differently than he did in the first part of this verse. Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate one of the purposes for Jesus being **raised**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of our justification” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 5:intro i1dt 0 # Romans 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n4. Righteousness is received through Jesus Christ by trusting in him (3:21–5:21)\n * God’s righteousness is received through faith (3:21–26)\n * No one can boast in works (3:27–31)\n * The examples of Abraham and David (4:1–25)\n * The blessings of justification (5:1–11)\n * Adam and Christ are compared (5:12–5:21)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The second Adam\n\nAdam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. In this chapter Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” and the true son of God. Jesus brings eternal life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\nIn this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “justified by faith” in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 5:1 age4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases οὖν 1 **Therefore**, here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the blessed results of a person becoming righteous by trusting in Jesus, which Paul just discussed in [1:18](../01/18.md)–[4:25](../04/25.md). Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “Since all these things are true” or “As a result of everything that I have just told you being true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:1 xmp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result δικαιωθέντες & ἐκ πίστεως, εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Let us have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, because we have been justified by faith” or “We can have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, since we have been justified by faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:1 xott rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δικαιωθέντες 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “because God makes us righteous” or “since God makes us right with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:1 wbwx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ πίστεως 1 See how you translated this phrase in [4:16](../04/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:1 ldru rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν 1 Some ancient copies say “we have peace,” which makes sense, since [verses 1–5](../05/01.md) are a list of blessings that belong to those people who have been **justified by faith**. If the reading **let us have peace** is correct, this phrase may be indicating Paul’s desire that his fellow believers continue to experience the peace they have with God. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 5:1 kjpb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἔχωμεν 1 Paul uses the phrase **let us have peace** to exhort his Christian readers to continue living peacefully with God. It is not a command. This phrase does not imply that those who have been **justified by faith** do not yet have peace with God. Use a form in your language that communicates an exhortation. Alternate translation: “we must continue to have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 5:1 hi12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:1 o2yr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they could possess or own **peace**. He means that they can live peacefully with God. If your readers would not understand what **have peace** means in this context, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “let us live in a peaceful manner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:1 s6xd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἔχωμεν & ἡμῶν 1 Here and throughout this chapter the pronouns **us** and **our** inclusively refer to all those **having been justified by faith** in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “let us believers … our” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 5:1 xaeg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **through** indicates that **our Lord Jesus Christ** is the means by which believers have **peace with God**. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have **peace with God**, as briefly mentioned in [4:25](../04/25.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what our Lord Jesus Christ did for us” or “which was caused by our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:2 slyh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δι’ οὗ καὶ τὴν προσαγωγὴν ἐσχήκαμεν, τῇ πίστει εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **access**, **faith**, or **grace**, you could express the same ideas another way. Alternate translation: “through whom we also access and stand in how gracious God is by trusting in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:2 tsbo rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗ 1 The pronoun **whom** refers to “our Lord Jesus Christ,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 5:2 i50u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καὶ & ἐσχήκαμεν & ἑστήκαμεν & καυχώμεθα 1 The pronoun **we** in this verse refers inclusively to all believers in Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “we believers also have … we believers stand … we believers boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 5:2 af0n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **grace** as if it were a location that someone could access and stand within. He means that trusting in Jesus allows believers to confidently experience how gracious God is toward his people. If your readers would not understand this, you express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to confidently experience how kind God is” or “to safely experience how gracious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:2 dxcu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **hope and **glory**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “we may boast because we are confident that we will be glorified with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:2 zp5p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using possessive forms to describe how **glory** relates to **God**. This could refer to: (1) the glory that God shares with believers. This was the same glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned, as mentioned in [3:23](../03/23.md). Alternate translation: “of sharing in the glory God has” or “of the glory from God” (2) glorifying God, as in the similar phrase “the glory of the imperishable God” in [1:23](../01/23.md). Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:3 q5p7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὐ μόνον δέ 1 The pronoun **this** here refers to boasting about “the hope of the glory of God,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And we not only boast on the basis of the hope of the glory of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 5:3 c644 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ καυχώμεθα ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν 1 Here, **in our sufferings** could mean: (1) believers can **boast** about their **sufferings**. Alternate translation: “we can also boast about our sufferings” (2) believers can boast while they are experiencing **sufferings**. Alternate translation: “we can also boast when we are distressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:3 xeak rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδότες 1 Here, **knowing** indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse are the reasons why believers can **boast in our sufferings**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:3 c0rl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν & ἡ θλῖψις & ὑπομονὴν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sufferings**, **suffering**, and **endurance**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “when we suffer … when we suffer … a way to endure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:3 vmbf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany ἡ θλῖψις ὑπομονὴν κατεργάζεται 1 Paul uses a repetitive series of clauses in this clause and the next verse to show how many reasons there are for Christians to boast about their suffering. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list a series of reasons for something. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) 5:3 lo57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ θλῖψις ὑπομονὴν κατεργάζεται 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **endurance** as if it were an object that could be produced. He means that when Christians trust in God while **suffering**, they develop greater **endurance** than they had before experiencing **suffering**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “this suffering helps us know how to endure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:4 w7c2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἡ δὲ ὑπομονὴ δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ ἐλπίδα 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and endurance produces character, and this character produces hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 5:4 dt8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ & ὑπομονὴ 1 See how you translated **endurance** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:4 gjvh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ 1 The word translated **character** refers specifically to someone who has been approved by God because they have successfully endured testing. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **character**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “makes us approved by God, and when God approves us it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:4 eh9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐλπίδα 1 See how you translated **hope** in [verse 2](../05/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:5 u4xh rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς οὐ καταισχύνει, ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “And because the love of God has been poured into our hearts through the Holy Spirit, who has been given to us, that hope does not disappoint” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:5 rctz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς 1 Here, **that hope** refers to **the hope of the glory of God** in [verse 2](../05/02.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And being confident in God’s glory” or “And the hope of the glory of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:5 qka8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **love** as if it were something that could be **poured** out of a container, and speaks figurative of **our hearts** as though they were containers that could be filled. He means that the Holy Spirit has completely revealed to God’s people how much God loves them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “because the Holy Spirit, who was given to us, has deeply revealed how much God loves his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:5 dc95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, who God gave us, has poured the love of God into our hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:5 clmb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **love** relates to **God**. Here, **the love of God** could refer to: (1) God’s love for us. Alternate translation: “God’s love” or “God’s love for us” (2) our love for God. Alternate translation: “love for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:5 glt1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 See how you translated this word in [1:21](../01/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 5:6 x5eg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in [verses 6–8](../05/06.md) explains “the love of God” in [verse 5](../05/05.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:6 a7s7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἔτι & ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν 1 In this clause Paul is describing something that was true during the time period he is describing in the rest of the verse. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “during the time we were still being weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) 5:6 xqr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔτι & ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν 1 Here, **weak** means that people are completely unable to make themselves righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we still being powerless to make ourselves righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:6 xl85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὲρ ἀσεβῶν 1 Here, **ungodly ones** refers to **we** mentioned earlier in the verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on behalf of us ungodly ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:7 o92c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains how surprising it is that Christ would die on the behalf of ungodly sinners, as stated in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:7 h089 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo μόλις γὰρ & τις ἀποθανεῖται & γὰρ & τάχα τις 1 Paul uses **someone** twice in this verse to indicate two hypothetical situations. He does this to help his readers recognize how rare it is for someone to voluntarily die on behalf of another person. Use the natural form in your language for expressing hypothetical situations. Alternate translation: “Let us consider how rare it would be for someone to die … Let us, though, suppose that just maybe someone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 5:7 x60d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast γὰρ & τάχα τις 2 What follows the word **though** here is in contrast to what Paul stated in the previous sentence. Although **someone will hardly die** for **a righteous person**, **someone** might possibly be willing to die for a **good person**. Although Paul does not state the difference between **a righteous person** and **a good person**, he contrasts both examples to emphasize how unlikely it is for a person to die on the behalf of another person. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast, perhaps someone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 5:7 mqyq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ τολμᾷ ἀποθανεῖν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of dying as if it were a **dare** or challenge for **someone** to overcome. He means that **someone** would be brave enough to give their life for the sake of someone else. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “might even be willing to die” or “would even be brave enough to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:8 qh0h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἑαυτοῦ 1 Paul uses the word **his own** to emphasize how much **God** loves his people. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “his very own” or “his personal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 5:8 vh6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀγάπην εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how much God loves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:8 c8vd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν 1 In this clause Paul is describing something that was true during the time period he is describing in the rest of the verse. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “during the time we were still being sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) 5:8 fel5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν, Χριστὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἀπέθανεν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Christ died for us, while we were still being sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 5:8 w7hy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἁμαρτωλῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **sinners** as a plural noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who lived sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 5:9 vnxd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον 1 Here, **then** indicates that what follows is the result of what Paul described in [verses 6–8](../05/06.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As a result, much more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:9 tewt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον 1 **Much more then** here strongly emphasizes that what follows is another important result of what Christ did for us. Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “It is then much more certain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:9 zp4v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result δικαιωθέντες νῦν ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ 1 This clause states the reason why **we** can be **much more** certain that **we will be saved**. Use the most natural way in your language to express a reason clause. Alternate translation: “because we have now been justified by his blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:9 x9yi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δικαιωθέντες νῦν ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his blood having now justified us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:9 nvs3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ 1 See how you translated **his blood** in [3:25](../03/25.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 5:9 jbaz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθησόμεθα δι’ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:9 bev3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὀργῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **the wrath**, you could use a different expression. Here, **the wrath** refers specifically to “the day of wrath”, which is mentioned in [2:5](../02/05.md). Alternate translation: “the Final Judgment” or “from when God finally judges sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:10 wply rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an alternate expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:10 mz06 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & ἐχθροὶ ὄντες 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since being enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 5:10 rnc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατηλλάγημεν τῷ Θεῷ διὰ τοῦ θανάτου τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the death of his Son reconciled us to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:10 cu3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 **Son** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 5:10 o1m6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases πολλῷ μᾶλλον 1 Here, **much more** strongly emphasizes that what follows is an important result of **having been reconciled** with **God**. See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “it is much more certain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:10 n817 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταλλαγέντες 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea with an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he having reconciled us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:10 e4ug rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καταλλαγέντες 1 This clause states the reason why **we** can be **much more** certain that **we will be saved**. Use the most natural way in your language to express a reason clause. Alternate translation: “because we have been reconciled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:10 tmxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθησόμεθα ἐν τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea with an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his life will save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:10 gcto rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis σωθησόμεθα 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the similar statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “we will be saved when God finally judges people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 5:10 eeo4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ 1 Here **life** implies the **life** that Jesus has after God made him alive again. This resurrection **life** showed that God had accepted Jesus’ death as the payment for the sins of everyone who trusts in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ life after God caused him to become alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:10 b3z4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “him being alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:11 a0vk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὐ μόνον δέ 1 The pronoun **this** could refer to: (1) what Paul said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Not only are we saved by his life, but” (2) what Paul said in [verses 2–10](../05/02.md). Alternate translation: “Not only are all these things true, but” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 5:11 zp36 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ καυχώμενοι ἐν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were boasting inside of God. Paul means that these believers in Christ **boast** about how great God is. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we also are boasting about how great God is” or “we also are boasting because of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:11 uukm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **through** indicates that **our Lord Jesus Christ** is the means by which believers can boast. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to be able to boast. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what our Lord Jesus Christ did for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:11 r0zj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ οὗ νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν 1 Here, **through** indicates that Jesus is the means by which believers **have received the reconciliation**. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have peace with God, as briefly mentioned in [4:25](../04/25.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what he did for us that caused us to receive the reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:11 xjes rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **reconciliation**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “we have now been reconciled with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:12 hjx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases διὰ τοῦτο 1 **For this reason** here indicates that what follows in [verses 12–21](../05/12.md) is Paul’s explanation of the relationship between human **sin** and God’s grace. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Because of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:12 wf9f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὥσπερ δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου ἡ ἁμαρτία εἰς τὸν κόσμον εἰσῆλθεν, καὶ διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους ὁ θάνατος διῆλθεν 1 Here Paul speaks of **sin** and **death** figuratively as if they were objects that could enter a place or spread within people. Paul means that the way God intended for **the world** and human beings to function became thoroughly corrupted by **sin** and **death**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “just as through one man sinned began to exist in the world, and that sin would result in that man’s death, so also all men born after that man would die too” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:12 pa8s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου 1 Paul uses the phrase **one man** to refer to Adam, the first human being. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in [verse14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “through the first man Adam” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:12 smc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἁμαρτία & τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως & ὁ θάνατος 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sin** and **death**, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “sinful things … sinful things, living things could die, so also the ability to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:12 uxcs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and through sin death entered into the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 5:12 xhbv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπους 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 5:12 jy25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐφ’ ᾧ πάντες ἥμαρτον 1 Here the pronoun **which** could refer to: (1) the fact that Paul states in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “because of this fact, namely, that all sinned” (2) the **one man** mentioned earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “because of the one man all sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 5:12 si2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντες 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all men” or “all humanity” or “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 5:13 at4i rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in [verses 13–14](../05/13.md) explains how death and **sin** existed before the **law**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:13 e6bx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἄχρι γὰρ νόμου & μὴ ὄντος νόμου 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “For until the law came … when there was no law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 5:13 abjg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns νόμου & νόμου 1 In this verse **law** refers to the laws that God gave the Jews through Moses. See how you translated **law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 5:13 v51t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτία & ἁμαρτία 1 See how you translated **sin** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:13 uyd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἁμαρτία ἦν ἐν κόσμῳ 1 Here Paul speaks of **sin** figuratively as if it were an object that could exist in a place. Paul means that people sinned **in the world** before God gave his laws to Moses. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people sinned in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:13 juq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἁμαρτία & οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται 2 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not charge them with sinning” or “God did not reckon it as sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:13 izno ἁμαρτία & οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται 2 Alternate translation: “a record of sin is not kept” or “no account is kept of sins” 5:13 v5l9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result μὴ ὄντος νόμου 1 Here, **being** could indicate: (1) the reason why **sin is not charged**. Alternate translation: “because there was no law” (2) the time when **sin is not charged**. Alternate translation: “when there was no law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:13 j04c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ ὄντος νόμου 1 Here, **no law** implies that God had not yet given people his laws that could help them identify what sin is. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “being no law to identify to people what sin is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:14 bd3q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐβασίλευσεν ὁ θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως, καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς 1 Here, **death** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a king who **ruled** **over** people. Paul means that nobody could prevent themselves from dying. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no human could escape dying from Adam until Moses, even those” or “human life inevitably ended in death from Adam until Moses, even the lives of those” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 5:14 u66m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ θάνατος 1 See how you translated **death** in [verse 12](../05/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:14 pdrh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως 1 Here, **Adam** refers to the period of time when Adam lived and **Moses** refers to the period of time when **Moses** lived. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the time when Adam lived until the time when Moses lived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:14 w24g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ 1 This phrase gives us further information about over whom **death ruled**. It is not making a distinction between those who lived during the time of **Adam** and **Moses**. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “even over the people who did not disobey God in the same way that Adam did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 5:14 skns rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **likeness**, **transgression**, and **pattern**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Adam transgressed, who typifies the one who is coming” or “exactly how Adam transgressed, who resembles the one who is coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:14 k2w7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **the likeness** relates to the **transgression**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “like Adam’s transgression” or “in the same way Adam transgressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:14 e4ze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **Adam** as if he were a model or **pattern**. Paul means that **Adam**’s role is similar to the role of **the one who is coming** because both people do things that affect all human beings. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Adam, who is a replica of the one who is coming” or “Adam, who models the one who is coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:14 mu4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ μέλλοντος 1 The phrase **the one who is coming** refers to Jesus. Paul means that Adam represents the ideal human being, Jesus, who would come in the future. If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “representing Jesus who would come in the future” or “prefiguring Jesus who was destined to come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:15 x37x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ παράπτωμα & τὸ χάρισμα & τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **trespass**, **gracious gift**, **grace**, and **gift**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “how Adam trespassed … what God graciously gave … when the one man trespassed … how gracious God is and what he graciously gave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:15 ieb0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐχ ὡς τὸ παράπτωμα, οὕτως καὶ τὸ χάρισμα 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the gracious gift is not like the trespass” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 5:15 sful rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** indicates that what follows explains the difference between **the trespass** and **the gracious gift**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:15 yxej rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of **the gracious gift** are superior to the consequences of **the trespass**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 5:15 kdhb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the trespass** that was committed by the **one** man. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “by one man’s trespass” or “because one man trespassed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:15 mm6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῦ ἑνὸς 1 Paul is using the adjective phrase **the one** as a noun in order to refer to Adam, as in the previous verse. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could make these references explicit. Alternate translation: “of Adam, the one man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 5:15 e9me rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ πολλοὶ & τοὺς πολλοὺς 1 Here Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a large group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 5:15 h6c3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases πολλῷ μᾶλλον 1 Here, **how much more** strongly emphasizes the difference between the results of **the trespass** of Adam and the **grace of God** that comes through **Jesus Christ**. Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “even more certainly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:15 tfhj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι, τῇ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, εἰς τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐπερίσσευσεν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “abounded to the many the grace of God and the gift by the grace of the one man, Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 5:15 ejxz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that comes from **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s grace” or “the grace from God” or “how kind God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:15 wn36 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the grace** that comes from **the one man**. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “from the one man” or “associated with the one man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:16 ns9a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος, τὸ δώρημα; τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς, εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “Indeed, because the judgment came from one man unto condemnation, but the gift came from many trespasses unto justification. This is why the gift is not the same as through the one man who sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:16 rmpt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ δώρημα & τὸ δὲ χάρισμα 1 See how you translated these two phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:16 ok2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as what came through one who sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 5:16 muum rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος 1 Here, **one who sinned** refers to Adam, as mentioned in [verses 12–15](../05/12.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Adam, the one who sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:16 ub9s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ & κρίμα 2 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:16 eusx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξ ἑνὸς 1 Here, **one** refers to the **one** sin Adam committed. It does not refer to Adam himself, as the previous **one** does. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from Adam’s trespass” or “from the sin Adam committed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:16 xza3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐξ ἑνὸς 1 Here, **from one** could indicate: (1) that **the judgment** happened after the **one** trespass. Alternate translation: “after one” (2) that **the judgment** happened because of the **one** trespass. Alternate translation: “because of one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:16 t4t8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς κατάκριμα & παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **condemnation**, **trespasses**, and **justification**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to cause God to condemn … sinful deeds people have done, to cause God to justify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:16 s82t rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς κατάκριμα 1 Here, **to** indicates that was follows is the result of God’s **judgment**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “resulted in condemnation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:16 m5k4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων 1 Here, **from many trespasses** could indicate: (1) that **the gracious gift** happened after **many trespasses**. Alternate translation: “after many trespasses” (2) that **the gracious gift** happened because of **many trespasses**. Alternate translation: “because of many trespasses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:16 jarb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς δικαίωμα 1 Here, **to** indicates that was follows is the result of God’s **gracious gift**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “resulted in justification” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:17 n5zx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows further explains the difference between **the trespass** and **the gift**, as discussed in [verses15–16](../05/15.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:17 mhtc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of **the gift** are superior to the consequences of **the trespass**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 5:17 lcyd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 15](../05/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:17 whbf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῦ ἑνὸς & τοῦ ἑνός & τοῦ ἑνὸς 1 See how you translated the first occurrence of **one** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 5:17 yvq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι, ὁ θάνατος & τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης & ἐν ζωῇ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because the one man trespassed, the fact that people die … how abundantly kind God is and how he makes people righteous … by living” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:17 kz6z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ θάνατος ἐβασίλευσεν 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 14](../05/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 5:17 mtr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦ ἑνός 1 Here, **through** indicates that **the one** is the reason why **death ruled**. Use an expression in your language that indicates a reason. Alternate translation: “because of the one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:17 lf7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases πολλῷ μᾶλλον 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verses 10](../05/10.md) and [15](../05/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:17 hfvt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν, διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ. 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “through the one man Jesus Christ will … rule in life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 5:17 xy6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ & ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were kings who **rule** in a location called **life**. This could mean: (1) they will have control over their sinful desires while physically alive. Alternate translation: “will those … have control over their sinfulness while alive” (2) they **will rule** with **Jesus Christ** while living eternally. Alternative translation: “will those … rule and live eternally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:17 nr25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες 1 This clause describes the people who will **rule in life**. It is not making a distinction between **those who receive** and those who **rule**. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “those who receive the abundance of the grace and the gift of the righteousness as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 5:17 fodc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος & λαμβάνοντες 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **abundance** that relates to **grace**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “those who receive God’s abundant grace” or “those who experience how abundantly gracious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:17 o8c3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **righteousness** is a **gift**. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “the gift, which is being made righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:17 ehbk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **through** indicates that **the one, Jesus Christ** is the reason why his people will **rule in life**. Use an expression in your language that indicates a reason. Alternate translation: “because of the one, Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:17 uifs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase **the one, Jesus Christ** refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to **rule in life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what the one, Jesus Christ has done for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:18 e7cq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἄρα οὖν ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς παραπτώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς κατάκριμα, οὕτως καὶ δι’ ἑνὸς δικαιώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς δικαίωσιν ζωῆς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “So then, as one man trespassed and this trespass caused all men to become condemned, so also one man acted righteously and this act caused all men to become justified for living eternally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 5:18 mccf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἄρα οὖν 1 **So then** indicates that what follows in [verses 18–21](../05/18.md) summarizes the ideas of [verses 12–17](../05/12.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could use a clearer expression. Alternate translation: “Finally” or “In summary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:18 sfwg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result δι’ & δι’ 1 See how you translated **through** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:18 z0jq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns παραπτώματος & κατάκριμα & δικαίωσιν 1 See how you translated these abstracts nouns in [verse 16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:18 n8pr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πάντας ἀνθρώπους & πάντας ἀνθρώπους 2 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See how your translated **all men** in [verse 12](../05/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 5:18 bcm2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δικαίωσιν ζωῆς 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **justification** relates to **life**. This could mean: (1) **justification** that leads to **life**. Alternate translation: “justification that brings eternal life” (2) **justification** that is **life**. Alternate translation: “justification, which is eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 5:18 bmey rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ζωῆς 1 Here, **life** refers to “eternal life.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:19 hj69 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:19 sjek rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ 1 See how you translated the similar connective words **as** and **so also** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:19 rgji rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ & διὰ 1 See how you translated **through** in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:19 z8r8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου & τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **disobedience** and **obedience**, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. You may need to supply an object for the verbs, such as “God” or “God’s command.” Alternate translation: “the one man disobeying God … the one man obeying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:19 qpsm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου 1 Here, **the one man** refers to “Adam.” See how you translated the similar use of **one man** in [verse 12](../05/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:19 q8lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διὰ τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, ἁμαρτωλοὶ κατεστάθησαν οἱ πολλοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the disobedience of the one man caused many to become sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:19 huig rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ πολλοί & οἱ πολλοί 2 See how you translated **the many** in [verse 15](../05/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 5:19 px2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἁμαρτωλοὶ 1 See how you translated **sinners** in [verse 8](../05/08.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 5:19 bhra rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διὰ τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς, δίκαιοι κατασταθήσονται οἱ πολλοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the obedience of the one caused many to become righteous ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 5:19 haks rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ ἑνὸς 2 Here, **the one** refers to “Jesus Christ.” See how you translated the third occurrence of **the one ** in [verse 17](../05/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:20 lah6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns νόμος 1 See how you translated **the law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 5:20 w958 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification παρεισῆλθεν 1 The word translated **slipped in** can mean to sneak in unnoticed, as in [Jude 1:4](../../jud/01/04.md). Paul may be stressing how the coming of **the law** was like an unwelcome person secretly intruding at some location. If this is confusing in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “intruded like a person sneaking in unnoticed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 5:20 ttcw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ παράπτωμα & ἡ ἁμαρτία & ἡ χάρις 1 See how you translated the abstract nouns **trespass** in [verses 15–18](../05/15.md), **sin** in [verses 12–13](../05/12.md), and **grace** in [verses 15](../05/15.md) and [17](../05/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:20 relk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα & ἐπλεόνασεν ἡ ἁμαρτία, ὑπερεπερίσσευσεν ἡ χάρις 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the trespass**, **sin**, and **grace** as if they were objects that could increase in amount. He means that the power or influence of these concepts expanded throughout humanity. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the trespass might be more evident … sin became more evident, the grace became even more obvious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:20 wbh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα 1 This clause could refer to: (1) one of God’s purposes for giving **the law**. Alternate translation: “in order to increase the trespass” (2) the result of God giving **the law**. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “resulting in the trespass increasing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 5:20 godn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὗ 1 Here Paul uses **where** figuratively to refer to **sin** and **grace** as if they were located somewhere. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 5:21 ycy7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** here introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God caused grace to abound, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 5:21 ymxy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ 1 See how you translated **just as** and **so also** in the [verse 19](../05/19.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 5:21 leu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ & ἡ χάρις & δικαιοσύνης & ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 See how you translated the abstract nouns **sin** and **grace** in the previous verse, **death** and **righteousness** in [verse 17](../05/17.md), and **eternal life** in [2:7](../02/07.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 5:21 wmy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐβασίλευσεν ἡ ἁμαρτία 1 Here, **sin** is spoken of figuratively as if it were a king ruling over people. Paul means that everyone was controlled by their sinful desires. While death **ruled** in [verse 14](../05/14.md), **sin ruled** after God gave the law. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone was controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 5:21 wuh2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ 1 Here, **in death** could refer to: (1) the location in which **sin ruled**. Alternate translation: “in the place where death exists” (2) the means by which **sin ruled**. Alternate translation: “by means of death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 5:21 kc21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης 1 Here, **grace** is spoken of figuratively as if it were a king ruling over people. Paul means that God’s **grace** allows people to become righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how gracious God is might make people become righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 5:21 bk72 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ & διὰ 1 See how you translated **through** in the [verses 17–19](../05/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:21 c9nj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 Here, **to** indicates that was follows is the result of God’s **grace** ruling **through righteousness**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “resulted in eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 5:21 axr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 The phrase **Jesus Christ our Lord** refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have **eternal life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what Jesus Christ our Lord has done for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:intro v522 0 # Romans 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)\n * Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14)\n * Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Slavery\n\nIn this chapter Paul frequently uses the metaphor of the relationship between slaves and their masters. He speaks figuratively of people who live sinfully as if they were slaves to sin and the death it causes ([6:6](../06/06.md), [16–17](../06/16.md), [20](../06/20.md)). He also speaks figuratively of Christians as if God has freed them from being enslaved to sin and has himself or righteousness their master ([6:18](../06/18.md), [22](../06/22.md)). Because Christians are no longer controlled by their desire to sin, they should instead serve God and live in a way that glorifies him ([6:12–14](../06/12.md), [19](../06/19.md)). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/servant]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nIn [verses 1–3](../06/01.md), [15–16](../06/15.md), and [21](../06/21.md) Paul uses rhetorical questions in order to answer objections that people might make about what he is saying.\n\n## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Inclusive language\n\nIn this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “baptized into Christ Jesus” in [verse 3](../06/03.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 6:1 fxgw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τί οὖν 1 Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in [5:20](../05/20.md). See how you translated **What then** in [3:1](../03/01.md) and [4:1](../04/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:1 pvg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ? 1 In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to address rumors some people may have been saying that misrepresented his teachings. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that we should continue in the sin so that the grace might increase!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 6:1 t8tl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ? 1 In this verse and the first part of the next verse, Paul is speaking as if he were a Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous chapter. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 6:1 fj9e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν 1 When Paul says **we** in this verse, he is including all “who were baptized into Christ Jesus,” as mentioned in [6:3](../06/03.md), so **we** is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 6:1 ngpt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ & ἡ χάρις 1 See how you translated the abstract nouns **sin** and **grace** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:1 sa16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were a location. He is referring to the idea of people continuing to live sinfully after they have become Christians. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Should we continue to live sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:1 ju6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **grace** as if it were an object that could **increase** in amount, as he also does in [5:20](../05/20.md). He is referring to the idea of Christians experiencing the power or influence of **grace** in their lives. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “so that we can experience more grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:1 f5qt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ 1 The phrase **so that** here introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the supposed purpose for which someone would **sin**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to increase the grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 6:2 e82n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ γένοιτο 1 In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:2 pa6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations μὴ γένοιτο 1 See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 6:2 wvhg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ? 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We who died to sin surely cannot still live in it!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 6:2 rgte rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ? 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were a location where Christians could live or die. Here, **died to sin** refers to the idea that Christians are no longer controlled by their sinful desires. By contrast, **live in** sin means to continue being controlled by sinful desires. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “We who are no longer controlled by our desire to sin, how could we still live as though we are controlled by that desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:3 wwaw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ὅτι ὅσοι ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν? 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know that as many as were baptized into Christ Jesus were baptized into his death!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 6:3 wh26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὅσοι 1 Paul is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as many people as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 6:3 yy94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as many people as someone baptized into Christ Jesus someone also baptized into his death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:3 bd11 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **Christ Jesus** and **his death** as if they were locations into which someone could be **baptized**. Here, **into Christ Jesus** refers to being united with **Christ Jesus**, and **into his death** refers to sharing in the spiritual benefits of **his death**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning of these two phrases plainly. Alternative translation: “were baptized are united with Christ Jesus and also share in the benefits of his death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:3 tcve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸν θάνατον 1 See how you translated **death** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:4 m43r rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result συνετάφημεν οὖν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Therefore, we were buried” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:4 f4va rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνετάφημεν οὖν αὐτῷ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of Christians as if they **were buried** with Jesus when they were baptized. Paul mentions burial because it emphasizes that Jesus did indeed die. Here he means that Christians are indeed united with Christ’s **death** and share in its spiritual benefits. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Then, we are indeed united with Christ’s death” or “Then, we are so united with Christ’s death that it is as if we were really buried with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:4 vva7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον 1 Here, **through** indicates that the following phrase is the means by which Christians **were buried** with Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the baptism into his death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:4 kmn3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸν θάνατον 1 See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:4 y71v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸν θάνατον & τῆς δόξης & ζωῆς 1 See how you translated the abstract nouns **death** in [6:3](../06/03.md), **glory** in [5:2](../05/02.md), and **life** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:4 k1el rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν 1 Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Paul is stating one purpose for which God instituted **baptism**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to make this explicit. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order for us to walk in newness of life, just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 6:4 kado rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ 1 See how you translated **just as** and **so also** in the [5:19](../05/19.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 6:4 z6zk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν 1 The point of this comparison is that the new way a Christian should live after being baptized is similar to being **raised** from the dead, like Christ was. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we should live in a new way, similar to when Christ was raised from death through the glory of the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 6:4 dpy2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the glory of the Father raised Christ from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:4 t47r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 See how you translated this phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 6:4 ce9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 See how you translated this phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 6:4 gblc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **glory** that comes from or characterizes **the Father**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “through the glory from the Father” or “through the Father’s glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:4 y29w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς δόξης 1 Here, **the glory** refers specifically to God’s glorious power. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the glorious power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:4 r3hn rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 6:4 gtns rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς & περιπατήσωμεν 1 Here Paul uses **walk** figuratively to refer to how a person lives and behaves. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “we … might act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:4 hyab rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **life** that is characterized by **newness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “with a new life” or “like those made newly alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:5 msbq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 6:5 jdzp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 6:5 p6xk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σύμφυτοι γεγόναμεν τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **death** as if it were something which Christians could be physically **planted together** with. He means that by being baptized Christians show that they participate in the spiritual benefits obtained by Christ’s death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we participate in Christ’s death through baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:5 z8wa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ & τῆς ἀναστάσεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of **likeness** and **resurrection**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what is like his death … his resurrecting from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:5 hg5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ 1 Here Paul implies that **likeness of his death** refers to the “baptism” referred to in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the likeness of his death that is represented by baptism” or “in baptism that represents dying with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:5 kfvs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως ἐσόμεθα 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **resurrection** as if it were something to which Christians could **become part of**. He means that Christians will one day rise from the dead like Christ did. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we will also certainly be resurrected like Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:6 fhvh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God crucified our old man together with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:6 lu12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **our** sinful human nature as if it were an **old man** who was nailed to the same cross as Christ. Paul means that when Christ was **crucified** he destroyed the power of **sin** and death that controlled all humans. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God destroyed the power of sin that controlled people when Christ was crucified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:6 y0ib rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns συνεσταυρώθη 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was crucified with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 6:6 n6o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 Here, **in order that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God **crucified our old man**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 6:6 jpge rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might nullify the body of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:6 jw00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the body of sin** as if it were a condition of slavery that could be cancelled. He means that Christ’s crucifixion removed the ability of sinful desires to control people. If your readers would not this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God might completely end how living sinfully controls people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:6 l6pd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **the body** is related to **sin**. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, **the body of sin** could refer to: (1) how humans tend to **sin**. Alternate translation: “our human tendency to sin” or “how living sinfully controls us” (2) how sin controls the human body. Alternate translation: “how sin controls our bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:6 l3zm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτίας & ἁμαρτίᾳ 1 See how you translated the abstract noun **sin** in [verse 1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:6 c5ie rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν 1 Here, **for** could indicate: (1) God’s purpose for nullifying **the body of sin**. Alternate translation: “in order for it to no longer enslave” (2) the result of **the body of sin** being **nullified**. Alternate translation: “causing it to no longer enslave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 6:6 rpax rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the body of sin** as if it could **enslave** people. Here he means that the desire to sin that controls people would no longer do so. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for it to no longer make us live sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:7 f893 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & ἀποθανὼν 1 Here Paul implies that **the one having died** is the same “old man” whom Paul said “was crucified” with Christ in the previous verse. Paul means that God considers any person who has “died to sin” ([6:2](../06/02.md)) to be **freed from** living sinfully. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who has died to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:7 qvgd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δεδικαίωται ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας 1 Paul continues the metaphor of **sin** enslaving people from the previous verse. Here Paul speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were something that people need to be **freed from**. He means that the desire to **sin** that controls people would no longer do so. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “no longer has to live sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:7 hoqm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δεδικαίωται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has freed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:7 geua rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτίας 1 See how you translated this abstract noun in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:8 mbx9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 In this verse, Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 6:8 wwhf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπεθάνομεν σὺν Χριστῷ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of Christians as if they physically died with Christ. He means that through baptism Christians show that they participate in the spiritual benefits obtained by Christ’s death and will one day **live together with him**. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we are united to Christ’s death when baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:8 c724 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πιστεύομεν 1 Paul implies that since Christians have **died with Christ**, the result is that they have confidence that they will **live together with him**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we are confident” or “this persuades us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:8 nuc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ συνζήσομεν αὐτῷ 1 Here Paul implies that **live together with him** refers to “eternal life”, as he mentioned in [5:21](../05/21.md) and [6:4–5](../06/04.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we will also live forever with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:9 bebx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εἰδότες ὅτι Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν, οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “knowing that Christ no longer dies, having been raised from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 6:9 zdkc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases εἰδότες ὅτι 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 6](../06/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 6:9 gjqq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised Christ from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:9 zkq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 See how you translated the similar clause in [verse 4](../06/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 6:9 lvv8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει; θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει 1 These two phrases mean similar things. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that **Christ** can never die again. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “he will absolutely never die again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 6:9 wem1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει 1 Here, **death** is spoken of figuratively as if it were a **lord** who could rule over someone. Paul means that Jesus could not possibly die again. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he no longer submits to being dead” or “he can never die again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:9 kl3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θάνατος 1 See how you translated the abstract noun **death** in [verse 4](../06/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:10 ehi9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** indicates that what follows is the reason why Christ “no longer dies,” as stated in the previous verse. Use the most natural way in your language to express a reason, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:10 e290 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃ 1 Here, **that which** refers to Christ’s death and life. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the death which” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 6:10 aw31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν 1 Here, **to sin** implies that Christ died for the sake of freeing humanity from being “enslaved to sin.” It does not mean that Jesus himself was ever controlled by sin before he died. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “he died for the sake of removing sin’s control over people” or “he died to stop sin from controlling people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:10 j7bl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃ 2 Here, **that which** refers to Christ’s life after God raised him from the dead. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the life which” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 6:10 z4yb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ζῇ τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here, **to God** implies that Christ now lives for the sake of glorifying God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “he lives for the sake of glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:11 zjjv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 Throughout [verses 11–23](../06/11/.md), the pronouns **you** and “your” are plural and refer to the believers in Rome to whom Paul wrote this letter. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers at Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 6:11 dw6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἶναι νεκροὺς μὲν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ 1 See how you translated “died to sin” in [verse 2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:11 bjxg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ζῶντας & τῷ Θεῷ 1 See how you translated the similar phrase “he lives to God” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:11 nkvd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:12 pp2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Therefore** here introduces a result clause. Paul is stating how he wants his readers to fact in response to what he said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “This is why” or “Because of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:12 s6h1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification μὴ & βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι 1 Here, **sin** is spoken of figuratively as if it were a king who rules over a place called **mortal body**. Paul means that Christians should not allow **sin** to control the way they use their bodies. See how you translated a similar use of **rule** in [5:21](../05/21.md). Alternate translation: “do not let your physical body become controlled by sinning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:12 z1ia rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι, 1 Although **body** here is a singular noun, Paul is referring to the bodies of his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a plural form. Alternate translation: “in your mortal bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 6:12 cm8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι 1 Here, **body** could refer to: (1) the whole person. Alternative translation: “in you” or “in your whole being” (2) the physical human body. Alternative translation: “in your physical body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 6:12 r462 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ 1 Here **in order to** indicates that what follows is the result of letting **sin rule**. Use a natural way in your language to express result. Alternate translation: “causing you to obey its lusts” or “resulting in you obeying your lusts”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:12 yg9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks of **lusts** figuratively as if they were people who could be obeyed. He means that people can submit to their desire to do sinful things. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to submit to your lustful desires” or “in order to do what you lust for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:12 zs9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **lusts**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how it urges you to lust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:12 kh3w rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **its** refers to **mortal body**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “your mortal body’s” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 6:13 wt07 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἀλλὰ παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ, ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας, καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses to emphasize the similar ideas. Alternate translation: “And do not keep presenting your members as tools of unrighteousness to sin, but present your members as tools of righteousness to God. And present yourselves to God, as living from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 6:13 mxto rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ & καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of body parts as if they were **tools** that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that he wants his readers to stop using their body parts for sinning, but instead to use them to live in the way God wants. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “And do not keep using your members to act unrighteously by sinning … and use your members to act righteously for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:13 qncn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὅπλα ἀδικίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **tools** that are characterized by **unrighteousness**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “as unrighteous tools” or “as tools for living unrighteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:13 hlzf ὅπλα & ὅπλα 1 The word translated as **tools** often refers to “weapons.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as weapons … as weapons” 6:13 wq3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of his readers as if they could offer themselves as slaves to their master, who is **God**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “devote yourselves to serving God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:13 px9k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας 1 The point of this comparison is that Christians should live in such a way that demonstrates that they are now **dead to sin, but alive to God**, as mentioned in [verse 11](../06/11.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as those who are free from living sinfully” or “as those who are no longer controlled by living sinfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 6:13 vk76 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 4](../06/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 6:13 amyo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this from the beginning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “and present your members” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 6:13 dz8u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **tools** that are characterized by **righteousness**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “as righteous tools” or “as tools for living righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:14 xfz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 6:14 u36f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἁμαρτία & ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει, οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because you are not under law, but under grace, do not allow sin to rule over you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:14 gez3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἁμαρτία & ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 12](../06/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:14 bl09 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἁμαρτία & οὐ κυριεύσει 1 Paul is using a future statement to give a command. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “sin must not rule over” or “do not allow sin to rule over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) 6:14 caqv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul urges his readers to not allow **sin** to **lord over** them. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 6:14 a0dz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **law** and **grace** as if they were rulers whose authority people have to live **under**. He means that Christians are no longer controlled by the requirements of the **law**, which resulted in people sinning more, as stated in [5:20](../05/20.md). By contrast, Christians now serve the gracious God, as is explained in [verses 15–23](../06/15.md). If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for the law no longer controls you, but you are now controlled by God’s grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:14 eibi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns νόμον 1 See how you translated **law** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 6:14 ypqx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὸ χάριν 1 Here, **grace** refers specifically to God’s gracious empowering of people to stop sinning. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “controlled by God’s grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:15 yk81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τί οὖν 1 Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in [verses 1–14](../06/01.md). See how you translated **What then** in [3:1](../03/01.md), [4:1](../04/01.md), and [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:15 zxb8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν? 1 Here Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in the previous verses. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we should sin because we are not under law, but under grace!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 6:15 rtts rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν? 1 In these two sentences, Paul is speaking as if he were a Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 6:15 t4cc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὑπὸ νόμον & ὑπὸ χάριν 1 See how you translated these phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:15 t52x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ γένοιτο 1 In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote earlier in the verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:15 c77g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations μὴ γένοιτο 1 See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 6:16 n5j4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους εἰς ὑπακοήν, δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε— ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην? 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know that to what you keep presenting yourselves as slaves for obedience, you become slaves to what you obey—whether of sin leading to death, or of obedience leading to righteousness!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 6:16 hn6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ᾧ & ᾧ 1 The pronoun translated **what** here indicates a general reference to a thing or person. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to whomever or whatever … to whomever or whatever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 6:16 g6zz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους & δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε 1 Paul speaks figuratively of people as if they could offer themselves as **slaves** to someone or something. He is referring to being controlled by someone or something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you keep being controlled by … you become controlled by what you obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:16 psrr rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ὑπακοήν 1 Here, **for** indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which these people are **presenting** themselves as **slaves**. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to obey” or “for the purpose of obeying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 6:16 zim4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς ὑπακοήν & ὑπακοῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **obedience**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “to obey … to obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:16 h0ar rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην 1 Here, **sin** and **obedience** are spoken of as if they were masters that **slaves** would obey. Paul means that people can be controlled either by their desire to **sin** or a desire to obey God. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “whether you are controlled by sinning, leading to death, or you are controlled by obeying God, leading to righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:16 gtzd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἁμαρτίας & ὑπακοῆς 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **slaves** that belong to **sin** or **obedience**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “slaves that belong to sin … slaves that belong to obedience” or “sin’s slaves … obedience’s slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:16 cyct rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτίας & δικαιοσύνην 1 See how you translated the abstract nouns **sin** in [verse 15](../06/15.md) and **righteousness** in [verse 13](../06/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:16 zfgc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς θάνατον & εἰς δικαιοσύνην 1 Here, **leading to** indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “resulting in death … resulting to righteousness” or “causing death … causing righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:16 d8gv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς θάνατον 1 Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “leading to spiritual death” or “causing one to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:17 xj75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations χάρις & τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here **thanks be to God** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 6:17 tl5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὅτι ἦτε δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας 1 Here **that** indicates that the clause that follows provides a contrast between who Paul’s readers were before they became Christians and who they were after they had **listened from the heart** to true Christian **teaching**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “even though you were slaves of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 6:17 yxt7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας 1 See how you translated the similar phrase **of sin** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:17 uwcy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὑπηκούσατε δὲ ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς & τύπον διδαχῆς 1 Here Paul speaks of **the pattern of teaching** figuratively as if it were a person who could be **listened** to. He means that his readers accepted the true Christian teaching that Christians were teaching them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “but you accepted the form of teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:17 ep7k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπηκούσατε 1 The word translated **listened** implies that the people who listened also responded by obeying what they heard. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you obeyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:17 my2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑπηκούσατε & ἐκ καρδίας 1 Here, **from the heart** is an idiom that refers to being sincere or doing something with one’s will and emotions. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you totally listened” or “you listened from deep within” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 6:17 lugj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the pattern of teaching** as if it were a slave-master to which people are **given over to** as slaves when they become Christians. Paul means that Christians should submit to the authority of true Christian teaching. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the pattern of teaching that you were submitted to” or “to the pattern of teaching that you were handed over to, as if you are its slave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:17 pz14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὃν παρεδόθητε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God gave you over to” or (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:18 fcd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ 1 Here Paul speaks of **sin** and **righteousness** figuratively as if they were slave-masters that people could be **enslaved** to. Paul means that his readers are no longer controlled by their sinful desires, but are controlled by the desire to live righteously. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And having been freed from having to live sinfully, you now have to live righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:18 y2zg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε 1 If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “And God having freed you from sin, he enslaved you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:18 twpq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτίας & δικαιοσύνῃ 1 See how you translated the abstract nouns **sin** and **righteousness** in [verse 16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:19 jlmd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνθρώπινον λέγω, διὰ τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of the weakness of your flesh, I speak as a man” or “Because you are still immature, I have to speak in simple terms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:19 puvh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνθρώπινον λέγω 1 Here, the phrase **as a man** is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am speaking based on how human beings perceive things” or “I am talking like a mere human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 6:19 gt1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν & τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν & τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **weakness**, **uncleanness**, **lawlessness**, **righteousness**, and **sanctification**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how weak your flesh is … to act impurely and to be more and more lawless … for living righteously, which leads to being sanctified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:19 l4ah rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν 1 Here, the term **flesh** is an idiom that refers to human nature. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “your human weakness” or “your natural limitations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 6:19 psmw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in [verses 17–18](../06/17.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 6:19 x2kt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὥσπερ & οὕτως 1 See how you translated **just as** and **so** in the [5:19](../05/19.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 6:19 jbcz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν & παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of body parts as if they were **slaves** that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that his readers used to use use their body parts to act impurely and to disobey God’s laws, but now they should use them to live in the way God wants. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated similar phrases in [verse 13](../06/13.md). Alternative translation: “you used your members to act uncleanly and to disobey God more and more … use your members to act righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:19 o0ta rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς ἁγιασμόν 1 The phrase **leading to** indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “resulting in sanctification” or “causing sanctification” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:20 s9pk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “This reason for this is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:20 i1ze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὅτε & δοῦλοι ἦτε τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ 1 Here, **sin** and **righteousness** are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters. Paul means that when his readers had previously used their bodies to act sinfully, they were not serving God’s purposes as **slaves** of **righteousness**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when you were controlled by sin, you did not serve God” or “when you were living sinfully, you did not live righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:20 mu0y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ 1 Paul is not making a serious suggestion here that sinful people are not required to live righteously. Paul actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of **free**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were unrighteous” or “you were unable to live righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) 6:21 x3bn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τίνα & καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε? τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “since the outcome of those things is death, what fruit were you then having because of which things you are now ashamed?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:21 kjl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίνα οὖν καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε 1 Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the futility of being “slaves to sin” in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation in order to communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So you were not then having any fruit because of which things you are now ashamed!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 6:21 vgam rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καρπὸν 1 Here, **fruit** is an idiom meaning “benefit” or “advantage.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “advantage” or “profit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 6:21 pnbm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐφ’ οἷς & ἐκείνων 1 Here, **which things** and **those things** refer to sins. If it might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of which sins … of those sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:21 j2ie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **outcome** and **death**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “For those things finally result in you dying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:21 tj21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit θάνατος 1 Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [verse 16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:22 x8vw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast νυνὶ δέ 1 **But now** introduces a contrast with the previous two verses, a contrast that focuses on time. The word translated **now** refers to the time after the Roman believers became Christians. If this contrast would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify what **now** refers to. Alternate translation: “But now that you believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 6:22 cqlf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ 1 This clause indicates the reason why Paul’s readers have **fruit leading to sanctification**. Use the most natural way in your language to indicate a reason clause. Alternate translation: “because you have been freed from sin and have been enslaved to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:22 fmtc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here, **sin** and **God** are spoken of figuratively as though they were slave-masters. Paul means that Christians are no longer controlled by their desire to sin, but are supposed to obey **God** instead. See a similar phrase in [verse 18](../06/18.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having been freed from having to live sinfully and having began to serve God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:22 z3ap rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ 1 If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God having freed you from sin and having enslaved you to himself” or “God having released you from being controlled by your sin and having caused you to serve him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 6:22 npf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔχετε τὸν καρπὸν ὑμῶν 1 See how you translated **fruit** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 6:22 a478 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἁγιασμόν, τὸ & τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 See how you translated the abstract nouns **sanctification** in [verse 19](../06/19.md), **outcome** in [verse 21](../06/21.md), and **eternal life** in [5:21](../05/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:22 lvhh rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς ἁγιασμόν 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 19](../06/19.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:23 gacy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that this verse gives the reason for what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language to make this emphasis explicit. Alternate translation: “This is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 6:23 ze3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος 1 Here, **sin** is spoken of figuratively as if it were a person who could pay **wages**. Paul means that the result of living sinfully is eternal **death**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when a person lives sinfully it results in eternal death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 6:23 juc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **death** as if it were **wages** paid to those who **sin**. He means that the result of living sinfully is eternal **death**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “whoever lives sinfully receives eternal death as the result” or “whoever lives sinfully earns eternal death as if it were wages for work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 6:23 iyv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the wages** that come from **sin**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “sin’s wages” or “the wages that come from sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:23 pizh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit θάνατος 1 Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of **death** in [verses 16](../06/16.md) and [21](../06/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 6:23 slyb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θάνατος; τὸ & χάρισμα & ζωὴ αἰώνιος 1 See how you translated the abstract nouns **death** in [verse 21](../06/21.md), **gracious gift** in [5:15–16](../05/15.md), and **eternal life** in [verse 22](../06/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 6:23 cwkw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ & χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gracious gift** that comes from **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s gracious gift” or “the gracious gift from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 6:23 jn66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **eternal life** as if it were occupying space inside of **Christ Jesus**. Paul means that **eternal life** comes by being united to **Christ Jesus**, as stated in [verse 11](../06/11.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for those who are united to Christ Jesus” or “comes through being united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:intro fl1y 0 # Romans 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)\n * Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14)\n * Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23)\n * Christians have been freed from the law (7:1–6)\n * The law is not sinful (7:7–12)\n * Christians still struggle with indwelling sin (7:13–25)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “The Law”\n\nThroughout most of this chapter Paul uses the singular noun “the law” to refer to the group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. However, in [verses 21–25](../07/21.md) Paul uses the word “law” in several different ways. Each of these different uses will be addressed in the notes. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Marriage\n\nScripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Inclusive language\n\nIn this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all Jewish believers in Christ. Paul calls these people “brothers” in [verses 1](../07/01.md) and [4](../07/04.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 7:1 mk7w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ἀδελφοί (γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ), ὅτι ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ? 1 Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that the Jew is required to obey the Law of Moses his whole life. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know, brothers (for I am speaking to those who know the law), that the law is lord of the man for as long as he lives!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 7:1 r9fl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί & τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & ζῇ 1 Although the term **brothers** and **the man** and **he** are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “fellow Jewish believers … a person … that person lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 7:1 s4su (γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ) 1 Here Paul interrupts himself in order to clarify that he is specifically directing this part of the letter to the Jewish believers in the church at Rome. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate this. 7:1 j67x rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul expects these **brothers** to understand what he is saying. Use the most natural way in your language to state a reason. Alternate translation: “I know you should understand this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:1 ajk4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns λαλῶ 1 The pronoun **I** and throughout this chapter refers to Paul (see [6:19](../06/19.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 7:1 k3h5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns νόμον & ὁ νόμος 1 For every occurrence of **the law** in [verses 1–20](../07/01.md) translate the phrase in the same way you translated it in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 7:1 okz5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 Here Paul speaks of **the law** figuratively as if it were a king. Paul means that, like a king, **the law** must be obeyed by those who are obligated to do so. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “like a king, the law must be obeyed by every Jewish person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:2 as1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is an example from God’s law that illustrates how “the law rules over the man for as long as he lives,” as Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “As an illustration,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 7:2 j4sn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ; ἐὰν δὲ ἀποθάνῃ ὁ ἀνήρ, κατήργηται & τοῦ ἀνδρός 1 Paul is speaking of Jewish **married** women and husbands in general, not of one particular **woman** or **husband**. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “married women remain bound by law to their living husbands, but if their husbands die, they have been released … of their husbands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 7:2 hpn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ & δέδεται νόμῳ & κατήργηται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law continually binds the married woman … God releases her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 7:2 l6d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ & κατήργηται ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τοῦ ἀνδρός 1 Here Paul speaks of the **law** figuratively as if it were a person who could tie a **woman** to her **husband**. Paul means that the **law** of Moses requires a **married woman** to stay married to her **husband** only while he is alive. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God requires in his laws that the married woman remain married to her living husband … she is no longer required to remain married to the husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:2 ag23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ νόμου τοῦ ἀνδρός 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the law** that is related to **the husband**. This phrase refers to the **law** already described in the previous clause. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the law that requires her to remain bound to the husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 7:3 w3yw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἄρα οὖν 1 See how you translated this phrase in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 7:3 ss60 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ζῶντος τοῦ ἀνδρὸς, μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει, ἐὰν γένηται ἀνδρὶ ἑτέρῳ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “if she becomes married to another husband, the first husband being alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 7:3 jbvc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ζῶντος τοῦ ἀνδρὸς 1 In this clause Paul is describing something that was occurring during the same time period as what he describes in the next clause. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “at the same time that the husband is alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) 7:3 ci5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἀνδρὸς & ὁ ἀνήρ 1 See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 7:3 r2m4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law will title her an adulteress” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 7:3 wg4k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐλευθέρα ἐστὶν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου 1 Here Paul speaks of **the law** figuratively as if it were an object or person someone could to be freed from. Paul means that **the law** that prohibited a woman from marrying **another husband** did not apply if her first husband died. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase “she has been released from the law” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “she is no longer required to remain married to the first husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:4 kvqw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 **So then** here introduces the result of what Paul said in [verses 1–3](../07/01.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:4 ne64 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 See how you translated this word in [verse 1](../07/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 7:4 z8zj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε τῷ νόμῳ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you also died to the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 7:4 svrq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε 1 Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize that even Jewish Christians are not required to obey the Law of Moses. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you very Jews yourselves were also made dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 7:4 vpwf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε τῷ νόμῳ 1 Here Paul uses **made dead** figuratively to refer to Jewish Christians not being required to obey the Law of Moses. Just as dead people don’t have to obey the law, so too Jewish Christians no longer have to obey it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “your yourselves no longer have to obey the law” or “you yourselves are like dead people in that you do not have to obey the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:4 v2tu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **through** indicates that **the body of Christ** is the means by which believers **were made dead to the law**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:4 glzf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **the body of Christ** refers to the death of Jesus’ body. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the death of Christ’s body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:4 xw6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς ἑτέρῳ 1 Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God **made** believers **dead to the law**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order for us to become married to another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 7:4 g59t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς ἑτέρῳ 1 Here Paul uses **married to another** to refer to Christians being united with **Christ** as if they became **married** to him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “so that you might become united to Jesus” or “so that you might be united with Christ like a woman becomes married to another husband”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:4 rj6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to the one whom God raised from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 7:4 t9nt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 7:4 gxjj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα καρποφορήσωμεν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here, **in order that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God **raised** Jesus **from dead ones**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order for us to produce fruit for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 7:4 c4rl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καρποφορήσωμεν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Paul uses **fruit** here figuratively to refer to actions that please God as if they were **fruit** that a person could grow. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we might be able to do things pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:4 ka0o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καρποφορήσωμεν 1 When Paul says **we** in this verse, he is including all those whom he called **brothers** earlier in this verse and in [verse 1](../07/01.md), so **we** is inclusive of all Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 7:5 i1zl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in the next two verses explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 7:5 gmb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἦμεν ἐν τῇ σαρκί 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the flesh** as if it were a location that someone could be **in**. He means his readers used to live according to the desires of their sinful natures. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we were living according to our sinful natures” or “we were doing whatever we wanted to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:5 bl7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὰ παθήματα τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου ἐνηργεῖτο 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **passions**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “wanting to sin that was through the law was working” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:5 g2rg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου ἐνηργεῖτο 1 Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Paul said something similar about **the law** causing sin to increase in [5:20](../05/20.md). Alternate translation: “that were increased through the law were working” or “that were stimulated by the law were working” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 7:5 vlev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ νόμου 1 Here, **through** indicates the means by which **the sinful passions** increased. Paul means that **the law** stimulated people’s desire to sin even more. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:5 tvku rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐνηργεῖτο ἐν τοῖς μέλεσιν ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the sinful passions** are if they were people who could work within someone’s body parts. He means that people’s sinful desires caused them to sin with their bodies. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were causing us to use our members to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:5 denv τοῖς μέλεσιν 1 See how you translated **members** in [6:13](../06/13.md). 7:5 pnw6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι 1 Here, **to** introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “which resulted in producing fruit” “so that they would produce fruit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:5 xed9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι 1 Here Paul uses **fruit**figuratively to refer to the result or outcome of someone’s actions. Here Paul uses **fruit** differently than how he used it in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: or “so that the outcome was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:5 m071 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῷ θανάτῳ 1 See how you translated the abstract noun **death** in [6:16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:5 ub7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ θανάτῳ 1 Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in [6:16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:6 mze7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast νυνὶ δὲ 1 See how you translated this phrase in [6:22](../06/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 7:6 l8w4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου & ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has released us from the law … to that which was holding us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 7:6 j6i3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου & ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα 1 Here Paul speaks of **the law** figuratively as if it were a slave-master from which someone must be **released** and who can hold people captive. Paul means that Christians do not have to obey the laws God gave the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “we no longer have to obey the law … to that which we used to be required to obey” or “we are like slaves who have been released from the law … to that which we used to have to obey like slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:6 l2l3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα 1 The phrase **that by which we were being held** refers to **the law**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the law by which we were being held” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:6 vcok rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποθανόντες ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the law** as if it were a location where Christians could die. Here, **died to** the law refers to the idea that Christians no longer have to obey the requirements of the laws God gave the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “no longer being required to obey that by which we were being held” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:6 zafg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is the result of Christians **having died to** the law. Use the natural way in your language to indicate a result clause. Alternate translation: “the result being that we might serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:6 f9n4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς 1 Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “we might serve God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 7:6 c1j8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν καινότητι & οὐ παλαιότητι 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **newness** and **oldness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. These words indicate different ways in which people**serve** God. Alternate translation: “in the new way … not in the old way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:6 vhqd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν καινότητι Πνεύματος 1 Paul uses the possessive form to describe the **newness** that is produced by **the Spirit**. Paul means that the Holy Spirit enables Christians to live in a new way that pleases God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a new way that comes from the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 7:6 rm8r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession παλαιότητι γράμματος 1 Paul uses the possessive form to describe the **oldness** that is determined by **the letter**. Paul means Christians do not live in the old way that the Law of Moses requires. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the old way that the letter requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 7:6 iozz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy γράμματος 1 Paul uses **the letter** figuratively to refer to **the law** which is written down with letters. See how you translated this word in [2:27](../02/27.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 7:7 k1jj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? 1 Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verses, especially what he said in [verse 5](../07/05.md). See how you translated this phrase in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:7 bnyx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία? 1 In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using questions to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in [verse 5](../07/05.md) because they misunderstood him. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that the law is sin!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 7:7 f3hc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία? 1 In these two sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a Jewish Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 7:7 zl8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἁμαρτία & τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sin**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “something sinful … what things are sinful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:7 erx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ γένοιτο 1 In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote earlier in the verse. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:7 u8gm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations μὴ γένοιτο 1 See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 7:7 y92j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 **But** here indicates that what follows is in contrast to the idea that **the law** is sinful. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless,” or “By contrast,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 7:7 zzsf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this sentence is an example from God’s law that illustrates the importance of **the law**. See how you translated the same use of **For** in [verse 2](../07/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 7:7 g0np rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τήν & ἐπιθυμίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **covetousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what it means to be covetous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:7 refv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν 1 Here Paul uses **said** to indicate a quotation from **the law** that is written in the Old Testament ([Exodus 20:17](../../exo/20/17.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 7:7 qb5v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the law** as if it were a person who could say something. He means that God **said** what was written down in **the law**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God said in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:8 mz77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀφορμὴν & λαβοῦσα ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, κατειργάσατο ἐν ἐμοὶ πᾶσαν ἐπιθυμίαν 1 Here Paul speaks of **sin** figuratively as if it were a person who could take an **opportunity** and produce **covetousness** within a person. Paul means that his desire to **sin** by coveting increased when he learned the commandment that prohibits coveting. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin, increasing as a result of the commandment, led me to covet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:8 fh6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς ἐντολῆς 1 Here, **the commandment** refers specifically to the command, “You will not covet,” in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the command that we should not covet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:8 w6ah rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐντολῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **commandment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:8 zeb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπιθυμίαν 1 See how you translated **covetousness** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:8 r5i2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification χωρὶς & νόμου, ἁμαρτία νεκρά 1 Here Paul speaks of **sin** figuratively as if it were someone who could be **dead**. Paul means that his desire to **sin** would not have increased if God had not given his laws. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if there were no law, my desire to sin would not have been stimulated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:9 cag9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χωρὶς νόμου 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively about the **law** as if it did not exist before he knew about it. Paul means that he not aware of God’s law **at one time**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while unaware of the law” or “without knowledge of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:9 sz5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐλθούσης & τῆς ἐντολῆς 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **the commandment** as if it were a person who could **come** to Paul. He means that he became aware of **the commandment**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when I became aware of the commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:9 i90y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐντολῆς, ἡ ἁμαρτία 1 See how you translated these abstract nouns in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:9 d4wm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς ἐντολῆς 1 Here, **the commandment** could refer to: (1) all the commandments that make up God’s law. Alternate translation: “God’s commandments” (2) **the commandment** against coveting, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the commandment against coveting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:9 q9le rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ ἁμαρτία ἀνέζησεν 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were a person who could come **to life**. This could mean: (1) Paul’s desire to sin was stimulated, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin was stimulated” (2) Paul realized that he was sinning, as mentioned in [verse 7](../07/07.md). Alternate translation: “I became aware of my sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:10 ouxm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγὼ & ἀπέθανον 1 Paul uses **died** here figuratively to refer to being spiritually dead, which is the spiritual condition of all non-Christians. Spiritual death results in eternal punishment in hell after a person’s body dies. Paul means here that he realized that he was spiritually dead when he understood God’s law. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I died spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:10 mzx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐντολὴ 1 See how you translated this abstract noun in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:10 jmso rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ζωὴν 1 Here, **life** refers to “eternal life.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:10 yu1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἡ ἐντολὴ, ἡ εἰς ζωὴν 1 Here, **for** indicates the purpose for **the commandment**. Paul means that God’s laws were intended to give eternal life to people who could obey them. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “the commandment that was intended to cause life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 7:10 a0rz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εὑρέθη μοι & αὕτη εἰς θάνατον 1 Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the result of **the commandment**. Paul means that God’s laws resulted in eternal **death** for people. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “it was found to result in death for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:10 hkce rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὑρέθη & αὕτη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I found it to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 7:10 jrrw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εὑρέθη & αὕτη 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the commandment** as if it were an object that could be **found**. Paul means that he realized that God’s law results in spiritual death for people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I realized it was to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:10 y97i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit θάνατον 1 Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in [6:16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:11 r582 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ & ἁμαρτία ἀφορμὴν λαβοῦσα διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς 1 See how you translated this clause in [verse 8](../07/08.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:11 qi99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐξηπάτησέν με 1 Here Paul speaks of **sin** figuratively as if it were a person who could deceive people. Paul means that his desire to sin tricked him into thinking that he could become righteous by obeying **the commandment**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused me to deceive myself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:11 qljg rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns δι’ αὐτῆς 1 The pronoun **it** refers to **the commandment**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 7:11 f6sx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀπέκτεινεν 1 Here Paul speaks of **sin** figuratively as if it were a person who could kill people. Paul means that his desire to sin caused him to disobey God’s law, which resulted in Paul being spiritually dead. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused me to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:12 h0li rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 **So then** here introduces the result of what Paul said in [verses 7–11](../07/07.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:12 i3ka rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐντολὴ 1 See how you translated this abstract noun in [verse 9](../07/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:13 us69 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Therefore** here indicates that what follows is the result of what Paul said in [verses 7–12](../07/12.md). Use a natural way in your language to introduce the result of something. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “This is why” or “Because of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:13 e1bx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τὸ & ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος? 1 Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the law did not directly cause him to become spiritually dead. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “surely what is good did not become death to me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 7:13 g451 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ & ἀγαθὸν & διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ 1 Here, **what is good** refers to the law. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s good laws … through those good laws” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:13 qwe9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος 1 Here Paul speaks of the law figuratively as if it could **become death**. Paul is referring to the idea that God’s laws directly caused him to become spiritually dead. He rejects this idea in the next sentence. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did … cause me to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:13 ee64 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit θάνατος & θάνατον 1 In this verse **death** refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in [6:16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:13 r84l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θάνατος & ἡ ἁμαρτία & ἁμαρτία & θάνατον & ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς 1 See how you translated the abstract nouns **sin** and **commandment** in [verse 11](../07/11.md) and **death** in [verse 10](../07/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:13 hgm6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations μὴ γένοιτο! 1 See how you translated this phrase in [3:4](../03/04.md) and [6:2](../06/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 7:13 f9md rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἀλλὰ ἡ ἁμαρτία, ἵνα φανῇ ἁμαρτία διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But sin produced death in me in order that it might be shown to be sin through what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 7:13 qoe9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἁμαρτία, ἵνα φανῇ ἁμαρτία διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον 1 Here, **in order that** indicates a purpose clause. Paul is stating a purpose for **sin** **producing death**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “sin produced death in me for the purpose of showing itself to be sin through what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 7:13 kvhi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φανῇ ἁμαρτία 1 Here Paul uses **shown** figuratively as if **sin** were an object that people could see. Paul means that God’s laws enable people to recognize what **sin** is. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it might be recognized to be sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:13 e7r4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ 1 Here, **through** indicates that **what is good** is the means by which sin is clearly understood to be sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:13 m4l5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ ἁμαρτία & μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον; 1 Here Paul speaks of **sin** figuratively as if it were a person who could kill someone. Paul means that his desire to sin caused him to disobey God’s law, which resulted in Paul being spiritually dead. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sin … caused me to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:13 pnq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **death** as if it were an object that could be inside a person. He means that he was spiritually dead. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “killed me spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:13 cuct rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα γένηται καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ἁμαρτωλὸς ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς 1 Here, **so that** indicates a purpose clause. Paul is stating another purpose for **sin** **producing death**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for sin to become sinful beyond measure through the commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 7:13 a6zb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς 1 Here, **through** indicates that **the commandment** is the means by which sin becomes **sinful beyond measure**. Paul means that God’s laws provide a standard by which people can understand how extremely sinful sin is. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:13 clht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification γένηται καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ἁμαρτωλὸς ἡ ἁμαρτία 1 Here Paul speaks of **sin** figuratively as if it were a person who could become more **sinful**. He means that God’s laws provide a standard by which people can understand how extremely sinful sin is. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sin might be recognized as sinful beyond measure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:13 oy2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν 1 The phrase **beyond measure** is an idiom that means “to a great degree” or “exceedingly.” If this might confuse your readers, you could use a similar idiom from your language or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to an extreme degree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 7:14 k5mg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that this verse is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things I have just said are true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:14 quen rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ νόμος πνευματικός ἐστιν 1 Here, **spiritual** means that the source of **the law** is God’s Spirit. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law comes from God’s Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:14 vxn0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἐγὼ & σάρκινός εἰμι 1 Paul uses the word **myself** to emphasize how the contrast between himself and **the law**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed am fleshly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 7:14 big5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σάρκινός 1 Here, **fleshly** refers to the weakness of sinful human nature, which is the inability to stop sinning without God’s help. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “spiritually frail” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:14 lx8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πεπραμένος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sold myself into slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 7:14 sr9e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πεπραμένος ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of himself as if he were a slave. Here, **sold into slavery** could refer to: (1) being influenced by one’s sinful human nature. In this case Paul would be speaking about his situation even after becoming a Christian. Alternate translation: “being under the influence of my sinful nature” (2) being controlled by one’s desire to sin. In this case Paul would be speaking about his situation before he became a Christian. Alternate translation: “being controlled by my desire to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:14 p9pi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 See how you translated this idiom in [3:9](../03/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 7:15 udc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that this verse is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:15 u3av ὃ & κατεργάζομαι, οὐ γινώσκω 1 Alternate translation: “I am not sure why I do some of the things that I do” 7:15 gneb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 2 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains “what I produce” in the previous sentence. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 7:15 e8ki rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐ & ὃ θέλω & ὃ μισῶ 2 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “what I do not want to do … what I hate to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 7:15 az2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole οὐ & ὃ θέλω, τοῦτο πράσσω & ὃ μισῶ, τοῦτο ποιῶ. 2 The phrases **I practice** and **I do** are exaggerations that Paul uses to emphasize that he often does what he does not want to do. It does not mean that Paul always does these things. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what I do not want, this I often practice … what I hate, this I often do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 7:16 xho0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & ὃ οὐ θέλω 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since what I do not want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 7:16 y26s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 7:16 q3b5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis σύνφημι τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι καλός 1 Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I agree with the law and thus confess that it is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 7:17 x667 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases νυνὶ δὲ 1 **But now** indicates that this verse is the logical conclusion based on what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a conclusion. Alternate translation: “So it is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 7:17 k7ag rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns οὐκέτι ἐγὼ κατεργάζομαι 1 Paul uses the word **myself** to emphasize the contrast between himself and **the sin** that causes him to do what he does not want to do. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “it is no longer I who produces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 7:17 id6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸ 1 The pronoun **it** here refers to doing the sinful acts that he does not want to do, as mentioned in the previous two verses. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those sinful deeds that I do not want to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 7:17 f6n8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ ἐνοικοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία 1 Here Paul speaks of **sin** figuratively as if it were a person who could live inside of a person. Paul means that his desire to **sin** causes him to do what he does not want to do. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin deeply influences me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:18 nqhc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous sentence. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 7:18 kf8z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οἶδα & ὅτι οὐκ οἰκεῖ ἐν ἐμοί, τοῦτ’ ἔστιν ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, ἀγαθόν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “I know that good does not live in me, (that is, in my flesh)” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 7:18 p0ma rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification οὐκ οἰκεῖ ἐν ἐμοί & ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, ἀγαθόν 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **good** as if it were a person who could **live** inside someone. He means that his sinful nature is not **good** at all. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there is nothing good about me … about my flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:18 p1c1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ σαρκί μου 1 Here Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to refer to his sinful nature. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my sinful nature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:18 kyx9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀγαθόν & τὸ καλὸν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **good**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “any good thing … what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:18 ye8x rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 **For** here indicates that the following sentence is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:18 gvev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τὸ & θέλειν παράκειταί μοι 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the wanting to do good is present in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 7:18 h934 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ & θέλειν παράκειταί μοι 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **wanting** as if it were something that could exist inside a person. Paul means that he truly wants to do something good. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I truly want” or “I deeply desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:18 uxwb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τὸ & κατεργάζεσθαι τὸ καλὸν οὔ 2 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the ability to produce the good is not in me” or “I am not able to produce the good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 7:19 xftc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the last sentence of the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 7:19 ri3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀγαθόν & κακὸν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **good** and **evil**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “good deeds … evil deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:19 j69g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὃ θέλω & ἀγαθόν & ὃ οὐ θέλω κακὸν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that these clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the good I want to do … the evil I do not want to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 7:20 kfvj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ 1 See how you translated this clause in [verse 16](../07/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 7:20 sk9q οὐκέτι ἐγὼ κατεργάζομαι αὐτὸ, ἀλλὰ ἡ οἰκοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία 1 See how you translated these clauses in [verse 17](../07/17.md). 7:21 rqfu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εὑρίσκω 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of a **law** as if it were an object that he could **find**. Paul means that he realized the **law** that is described in the rest of the verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I realized that there was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:21 qae3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄρα 1 Here, **then** introduces a result clause. [Verses 21–25](../07/21.md) describe the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in [verses 14–20](../07/14.md). Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:21 y5vo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν νόμον 1 Here, **law** refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this rule” or “a different kind of law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:21 xxq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τῷ θέλοντι ἐμοὶ ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν, ὅτι ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “that evil is present in me, in me the one wanting to do good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 7:21 mo4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐμοὶ & ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται 1 Here Paul speaks of **evil** as if it were an object that could be inside a person. Paul means that he does evil deeds. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I … I do evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:21 qn1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τῷ θέλοντι & ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν 1 Here, **the one wanting to do good** is giving further information about **me**, which refers to Paul. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who is the one wanting to do good (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 7:21 hqp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ καλὸν & τὸ κακὸν 1 See how you translated these abstract nouns in [verse 19](../07/19.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 7:22 mvod rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse is the reason why the previous verse is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 7:22 x28l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνήδομαι & τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the law of God** as if it were a location in which a person could **delight**. He means that God’s laws cause him to **delight**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I delight because of the law of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:22 nt65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **the law of God** refers to the laws that **God** gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says **the law**. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 7:22 m13q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον 1 Here, **the inner man** refers to a person’s mind. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the inner being” or “the mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:23 zp7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βλέπω 1 Here Paul uses **see** figuratively to refer to noticing or perceiving something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I perceive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:23 fct8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἕτερον νόμον 1 Here, **a different law** refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this rule” or “a different kind of law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:23 ijp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου, ἀντιστρατευόμενον 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **a different law** as if it were a person who could fight within someone’s body parts. He means that his sinful desires caused him to use his body to do sinful things that he did not want to do. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were causing me to use my members to sin in opposition to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:23 v8d8 τοῖς μέλεσίν & τοῖς μέλεσίν 2 See how you translated **members** in [6:13](../06/13.md). 7:23 t7yh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ νοός μου 1 Here, **the law of my mind** could refer to: (1) a principle that Paul thinks, which is the delight for God’s laws that he said in the previous verse is in his “inner man.” Alternate translation: “the principle I have thought” or “the principle in my mind” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul says that he serves with his mind in [verse 25](../07/25.md). Alternate translation: “God’s law that is in my mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 7:23 i8w4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession αἰχμαλωτίζοντά με 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **a different law** as if it were a person who could take someone **captive**. He means that his sinful desires controlled him against his will. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “controlling me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:23 u4ny rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ νόμῳ τῆς ἁμαρτίας 1 Here **the law of the sin** could refer to: (1) that principle that people have a sinful nature. Alternate translation: “the law that is my sinful nature” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul previously said in [verse 5](../07/05.md) stimulate people to sin more. Alternate translation: “God’s laws that stimulate sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:23 po29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ ὄντι ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the law of the sin** as if it were something that could be inside someone. He means he has a sinful nature that influences what he does with his body parts. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that influences what I do with my members” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:24 nu6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ταλαίπωρος ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπος! 1 This sentence is an exclamation that communicates despair. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “Oh, how miserable I am!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 7:24 hmhj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς με ῥύσεται ἐκ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου? 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize his despair. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one will rescue me from the body of this death!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 7:24 md8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **the body** relates to **this death**. This phrase could refer to: (1) **the body** that results in **this death**. Alternate translation: “the body that causes this death” (2) **the body** that is characterized by **this death**. Alternate translation: “this mortal body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 7:24 q74f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦ θανάτου τούτου 1 Here, **this death** could refer to: (1) physical death. Alternate translation: “that dies” (2) spiritual death. Alternate translation: “of this spiritual death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:25 w9ui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 This sentence is an exclamation that communicates joy. It is the answer to the rhetorical question that Paul asked in the previous verse. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating joy. Alternate translation: “Oh, how thankful I am to God through Jesus Christ our Lord!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 7:25 omjd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Thanks be to God who did this through Jesus Christ our Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 7:25 evnn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἄρα οὖν 1 **So then** indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes the ideas of [verses 14–24](../07/24.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could use a clearer expression. See how you translated this phrase in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 7:25 adx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ἐγὼ 1 Paul uses the phrase **I myself** to emphasize the contrast between himself and the sin that causes him to do what he does not want to do. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “it is indeed I who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 7:25 sxn3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τῷ μὲν νοῒ δουλεύω νόμῳ Θεοῦ; τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively **the law of God** and **the law of sin** as if they were people whom he could **serve**. He means that he wants to obey **the law of God** but often obeys his desire to sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “obey the law of God with the mind, but with the flesh, I obey the law of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 7:25 e163 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit νοῒ 1 See how you translated **mind** in [1:28](../01/28.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 7:25 dzjl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns νόμῳ Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 22](../07/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 7:25 cdkb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but with the flesh, I serve the law of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 7:25 fm51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ & σαρκὶ 1 Here Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to refer to his sinful nature. See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 18](../07/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 7:25 he4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 23](../07/23.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:intro ev4r 0 # Romans 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1–8:39)\n * Baptism represents union with Christ’s death (6:1–14)\n * Christians are now slaves of righteousness (6:15–23)\n * Christians have been freed from the law (7:1–6)\n * The law is not sinful (7:7–12)\n * Christians still struggle with indwelling sin (7:13–25)\n * The Holy Spirit dwells in Christians (8:1–27)\n * Christians have confidence in God’s love (8:28–8:39)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Indwelling of the Spirit\n\nIn [verses 9–17](../08/09.md) and [26–27](../08/26.md) Paul says that Holy Spirit dwells inside Christians to help them stop sinning and to intercede for them. The presence of the Holy Spirit within a person indicates that that person is a genuine Christian. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n### Predestination\n\nMany scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestined” in [verses 28–30](../08/28.md) and “elect” in [verse 33](../08/33.md). Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating these verses. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]])## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n## Important figure of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [verses 24](../08/24.md) and [31–35](../08/31.md) Paul uses rhetorical questions in order to emphasize that what he is saying is true. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### Litany\n\nIn [verses 35](../08/35.md) and [38–39(../08/38.md) Paul uses a repetitive series of words or phrases in order to emphasize the nothing can ever stop God from loving those who believe in Jesus. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Flesh\n\nPaul uses “flesh” in a variety of ways throughout this letter. In this chapter he frequently uses it to refer to sinful human nature. However, he uses “flesh” to refer to Christ’s physical body in [verse 3](../08/03.md). Every use of “flesh” will be discussed in the notes. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])\n\n### Inclusive language\n\nIn this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people “brothers” in [verses 12](../08/12.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 8:1 xq2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὐδὲν ἄρα νῦν κατάκριμα 1 Here, **therefore now** marks the beginning of a new section in the letter. It also introduces a result clause that concludes what Paul discussed in chapters 5–7. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “Since all these things are true, there is no condemnation at all” or “As a result of everything that I have just told you being true, there is no condemnation at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:1 xw65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατάκριμα 1 See how you translated this abstract noun in [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:1 ti0g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:2 whhz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:2 h1ka rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ & νόμος τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the law** that is characterized by **the Spirit of life**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the law that is characterized by the Spirit of life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:2 vt9k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & νόμος 1 Here, **the law** refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. See how you translated the similar use of **law** in [7:21](../07/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:2 hq2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the Spirit** that produces **life**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit that produces life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:2 x8uu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, **the Spirit** refers to the Holy **Spirit**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:2 ep3n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ζωῆς & τῆς ἁμαρτίας & τοῦ θανάτου 1 See how you translated the abstract nouns **life** in [2:7](../02/07.md), **sin** in [5:20](../05/21.md), and **death** in [5:17](../05/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:2 ionb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς ζωῆς 1 Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. See how you translated this use of the word in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:2 irh6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς ζωῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, ἠλευθέρωσέν σε 1 The phrase **in Christ Jesus** could refer to: (1) the means by which **the Spirit** sets a person **free**. Alternate translation: “of life set you free in Christ Jesus” (2) a characteristic of **the life**. Alternate translation: “of the life that is in Christ Jesus set you free” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:2 cgbe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse and in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:2 th4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἠλευθέρωσέν σε ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the law of sin and death** as if it were an object or person someone could be **set free from**. Paul means that the law that resulted in sin and death does not apply to those who are united with **Christ Jesus**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has caused the law of sin and death to no longer control you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:2 u82e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου 1 This could refer to: (1) the principle that people have a sinful nature that results in death, as mentioned in [7:23–25](../07/23.md). Alternate translation: “the principle that is my sinful nature that leads to death” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul previously said in [7:5](../07/05.md) stimulate people to sin more. Alternate translation: “God’s laws that stimulate sin and death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:2 jlq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ θανάτου 1 Here, **death** refers to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in [6:16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:3 mbh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 8:3 n9mr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός, ὁ Θεὸς 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “God did what the law was unable to do, in that it was weak through the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 8:3 z2ej rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns τοῦ νόμου 1 Here, **the law** refers to the laws that God gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says **the law**. See how you translated this expression in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 8:3 t8lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου & ὁ Θεὸς 1 Paul implies that **what the law was unable to do** was to make people righteous, which is the main theme of this book. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law was unable to make people righteous … but God did so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:3 j98t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός 1 Here Paul speaks of **the law** figuratively as if it were a person who **was unable to do** something and was **weak**. Paul means that the laws God gave the Jews could not make people righteous because people are naturally sinful and unable to obey those laws. If this might confuse you readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the law could not stop people from sinning, because sinful human nature prevented people from obeying it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 8:3 g6g4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει 1 This phrase is the reason why **the law was unable to do** what it was supposed to do. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “since it was weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:3 uzkh rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τῆς σαρκός 1 This phrase states the reason why **the law** **was weak**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “on account of the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:3 etf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom διὰ τῆς σαρκός 1 Here Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the similar use of **flesh** in [7:18](../07/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 8:3 p4qq τὸν ἑαυτοῦ Υἱὸν πέμψας, ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας, καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας 1 This clause indicates how God **condemned sin**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:3 tc37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τὸν ἑαυτοῦ Υἱὸν πέμψας 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “having sent his own Son to the earth” or “having sent his own Son to mankind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 8:3 csl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸν 1 **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the **Son** of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 8:3 uf94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the likeness** that is characterized by **sinful flesh**. He means that Jesus had the same human **flesh** that sinful people have, although Jesus never sinned. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning in a clearer way. Alternate translation: “in the same flesh that sinful human beings have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:3 xi5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **likeness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in flesh like sinful flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:3 v0h2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας & τῇ σαρκί 1 Here Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of flesh. See how you translated this use of **flesh** in [2:28](../02/28.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 8:3 hfr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περὶ ἁμαρτίας 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus was sent for the sake of doing away with sin. Alternate translation: “in order to do away with sin” (2) Jesus was an offering to pay for sin. Alternate translation: “as an offering for sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:3 gid8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification κατέκρινε τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were a guilty person whom a judge could condemn. Paul means that God removed the power that sin has to control people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he canceled the power of sin” or “he destroyed how sin controls people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 8:3 es29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ σαρκί 1 Here, **the flesh** refers specifically to Jesus’ body that died on the cross. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in his Son’s body on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:4 zcsi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 Here, **so that** indicates that what follows is the purpose for which God “ condemned sin in the flesh” of Jesus. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 8:4 j9ff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου πληρωθῇ ἐν ἡμῖν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one doing the action could be: (1) us. Alternate translation: “we might fulfill the righteous deeds of the law” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God might fulfill in us the righteous deeds of the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:4 puta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου πληρωθῇ ἐν ἡμῖν 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the righteous deeds of the law** as if they were something that could be located inside a person. Paul means that God enables Christians to do those **righteous deeds** that his law required. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the righteous deeds of the law might be done by us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:4 w2aa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **the righteous deeds** that God commanded in **the law**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the righteous deeds that the law requires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:4 rttr rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns τοῦ νόμου 1 Here, **the law** refers to the laws that God gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says **the law**. See how you translated this expression in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 8:4 bsp0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ἡμῖν, τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν, ἀλλὰ κατὰ Πνεῦμα 1 This clause gives further information about **us**. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “us, that is, those walking not according to the flesh, but according to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 8:4 acc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν 1 Here Paul uses **walking** figuratively to refer to how people behave or lives their lives. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those not behaving according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:4 grhf κατὰ σάρκα & κατὰ Πνεῦμα 1 Alternate translation: “determined by the flesh … determined by the Spirit” or “in conformity with the flesh … in conformity with the Spirit” 8:4 bgg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα 1 Here Paul uses **flesh** figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the similar use of **flesh** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 8:5 xzmt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:5 s5sb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom σάρκα & τῆς σαρκὸς 1 See how you translated **the flesh** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 8:5 b9in rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὰ τῆς σαρκὸς φρονοῦσιν 1 The phrase **set their minds on** is an idiom that refers to thinking carefully about something or being intent on doing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are intent on doing the things of the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 8:5 evgr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰ τῆς σαρκὸς 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **things** that are related to **the flesh**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “things pertaining to the flesh” or “fleshly things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:5 cqwa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ κατὰ Πνεῦμα 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but those existing according to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 8:5 x3o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “set their minds on the things of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 8:5 a2n5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **things** that are related to **the Spirit**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “things pertaining to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:6 uc6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 8:6 vyw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ & φρόνημα & τὸ & φρόνημα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mindset**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way of thinking … the way of thinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:6 my98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ & φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **mindset** that is focused on **the flesh**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the mindset that is focused on the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:6 b0wo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῆς σαρκὸς 1 See how you translated **the flesh** in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 8:6 czmn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result θάνατος 1 Here, **is** indicates that what follows is the result of **the mindset of the flesh**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “results in death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:6 mbte rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit θάνατος 1 Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in [6:16](../06/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:6 oviz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ & φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος 2 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **mindset** that is focused on **the Spirit**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the mindset that is focused on the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:6 q470 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ζωὴ καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Here, **is** indicates that what follows is the result of **the mindset of the flesh**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “results in life and peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:6 rqnl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ζωὴ καὶ εἰρήνη 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **life** and **peace**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “is living and being peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:6 fjk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ζωὴ 1 Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. See how you translated this use of the word in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:7 lsdo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διότι 1 Here, **because** indicates that this verse and the next verse give the reasons why what Paul said in [verses 5–6](../08/05.md) is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:7 gvcr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς 1 See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:7 fpt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔχθρα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hostility**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is hostile” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:7 pm7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:7 thq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται, οὐδὲ & δύναται 1 Here, **it** refers to **the mindset of the flesh** mentioned earlier in the verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this mindset does not subject itself to … this mindset is not able to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 8:7 z2ih rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται, οὐδὲ γὰρ δύναται 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the mindset of the flesh** as if it were a person who could **subject** himself to something. Paul means that the person who thinks with this **mindset** is unable to submit to God’s laws. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who thinks this way does not subject himself to … for he is not able to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 8:7 srp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τῷ & νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the law of God** as if it were a king or master whom someone could **subject** himself to. Paul is referring to someone obeying God’s laws. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it does not obey the law of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 8:7 brde rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns τῷ & νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in [7:22](../07/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 8:7 bhje rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:8 me7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ & ἐν σαρκὶ ὄντες 1 See how you translated this phrase in [7:5](../08/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:9 vdhw δὲ 1 **However** here indicates a strong contrast between people who have “the mindset of the flesh” referred to in the previous verse and the believers to whom Paul is writing this letter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 8:9 iybo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐκ ἐστὲ 1 Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize the contrast between his Christian readers and people who live **in the flesh**. Use a way that is natural in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “However, you are truly not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 8:9 czm9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν σαρκὶ 1 See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:9 e54u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Πνεύματι 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the Spirit** as if he were a location that someone could be **in**. He could mean: (1) believers are controlled by the Holy Spirit, which is how **in** is used earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “controlled by the Spirit” (2) believers are united with the Holy Spirit, which is how Paul used **in** in [verse 1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “united with the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:9 p55f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Πνεύματι & Πνεῦμα Θεοῦ & Πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ 1 These phrases all refer to the Holy **Spirit**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … the Holy Spirit of God … the Holy Spirit of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:9 y3vg rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 Here, **this one** refers to the person who **does not have the Spirit of Christ**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this person without the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 8:9 akl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession οὗτος οὐκ ἔστιν αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who does not belong to Christ. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “this one does not belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:10 ntqo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 8:10 q8be rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **you** as if **you** were a location that **Christ** could be **in**. See how you translated **in you** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:10 q2q4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρὸν διὰ ἁμαρτίαν, τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα ζωὴ διὰ δικαιοσύνην 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the Spirit is life because of righteousness even though the body is dead because of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 8:10 lae8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τὸ & σῶμα νεκρὸν 1 Paul is speaking of the bodies of believers in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “the bodies are dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 8:10 e6g9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρὸν διὰ ἁμαρτίαν 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the body** as if it were already **dead**. Paul means that the physical **body** of a Christian will still die **because of sin**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the body will certainly die because of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:10 yb1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα ζωὴ 1 Here, **the Spirit is life** could mean: (1) the Holy Spirit gives a person eternal **life**. In this case **Spirit** refers to the Holy **Spirit** and **life** refers to eternal **life**. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit grants eternal life” (2) a believer’s **spirit** is alive. In this case **Spirit** refers to the spirits of individual believers. Alternate translation: “but the spirit is alive” or “but your spirits are alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:10 ya21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ δικαιοσύνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of your righteous status” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:11 jlc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 8:11 i618 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα & αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα 1 These phrases refer to the Holy **Spirit**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … his Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:11 b9pu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν & ὁ ἐγείρας ἐκ νεκρῶν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 These phrases refer to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, who raised Jesus from dead ones … God, who raised Christ Jesus from dead ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:11 jr6p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν & ἐγείρας ἐκ νεκρῶν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 8:11 t27d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ζῳοποιήσει καὶ τὰ θνητὰ σώματα ὑμῶν 1 Paul uses **make alive** to imply that he is referring to the resurrection of Christians after they have died. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will also resurrect your mortal bodies after you have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:11 xi76 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ & αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα 1 Here, **through** indicates the means by which God will **make** Christians **alive**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of his Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:11 e6t8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦ ἐνοικοῦντος αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here, **who lives in you** gives further information about the Holy **Spirit**. It is not making a distinction between a Spirit that **lives in you** and a Spirit that does not. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “his Spirit, that is, the Spirit who lives in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 8:12 mv1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἄρα οὖν 1 **So then** here indicates that what follows in [verses 12–17](../08/12.md) summarizes the ideas of [verses 5–11](../08/05.md). See how you translated this phrase in [5:18](../05/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 8:12 qw5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 See how you translated this word in [7:1](../07/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 8:12 e3j8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὀφειλέται ἐσμέν 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of Christians as if they are **debtors**. He means that Christians are obligated to live according to the Spirit and not according to the flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have an obligation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:12 fb3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐ τῇ σαρκὶ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “we are not debtors to the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 8:12 ecoo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ σαρκὶ & τοῦ & σάρκα 1 Here Paul uses **the flesh** figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the same use of this phrase in [7:18](../07/18.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:12 dh1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν 1 Here, **to live** introduces an explanation of **the flesh**. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “that is, to live according to the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 8:12 gplu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 4](../08/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 8:13 dczr rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 8:13 ri75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα ζῆτε 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 4](../08/04.md) and in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 8:13 b9n5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μέλλετε ἀποθνῄσκειν 1 Here, **die** refers to dying spiritually, which is enduring eternal punishment in hell after experiencing physical death. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are going to die spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:13 ld2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος θανατοῦτε 1 Here, **put to death** means “completely stop doing something.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you stop doing the practice of the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:13 ze08 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the practices** that are done with **the body**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “what is done with the body” or “what you do with your body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:13 o1ly rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **practices**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is practiced with the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:13 nwul rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰς πράξεις 1 Here, **the practices** refers specifically to sinful **practices** that a person does with his **body**. If this might confuse you readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sinful practices of the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:13 xihu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τοῦ σώματος 1 Paul is speaking of bodies in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of your bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 8:13 dr0e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ζήσεσθε 1 Here, **live** refers to living forever with God in heaven after experiencing physical death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will live forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:14 utms rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:14 ojie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὅσοι & οὗτοι 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as many people as … these people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 8:14 u8pv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅσοι & Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ἄγονται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as many as the Spirit of God leads” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:14 yz28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Πνεύματι Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated **the Spirit of God** in [verse 9](../08/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:14 gd1i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations υἱοί Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul is using the term **sons** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 8:14 wrk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor υἱοί Θεοῦ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if **God** was their physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:15 wpp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 8:15 zi1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν 1 Here, **again** indicates that Paul’s readers had **a spirit of slavery** before they became Christians. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for a second time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:15 r57o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πνεῦμα 1 Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) a person’s attitude or emotional state. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (2) a demonic spirit. Alternate translation: “a demonic spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:15 av67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πνεῦμα δουλείας & Πνεῦμα υἱοθεσίας 1 In both of these phrases Paul is using the possessive form to describe something that causes something else to happen. If this is not clear in your language, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “a spirit that causes slavery … the Spirit that causes adoption” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:15 iwyy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δουλείας & φόβον & υἱοθεσίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **slavery**, **fear**, and **adoption**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of being a slave … you being afraid … of those who have been adopted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:15 c43f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς φόβον 1 Here, **leading to** indicates that **fear** is the result of receiving **a spirit of slavery**. Use a natural way in your language to express the result of something. Alternate translation: “resulting in fear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:15 ew0a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Πνεῦμα 1 Here, **the Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy **Spirit**, as indicated by the use of **Spirit** in the ULT. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (2) a person’s attitude or emotional state, as with the previous use of **spirit** in this verse. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:15 ecq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ 1 Here, **cry out** indicates that what follows is an emotional exclamation. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “Oh, Abba! Father!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 8:15 vxs9 Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ 1 Here Paul writes out the sounds of this Jewish Aramaic word **Abba** with Greek letters, which means **Father**. Since John translates the meaning next in the verse, you should write out this word using the most similar sounds in your language. 8:15 ahnr rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 8:16 mwbw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ Πνεύματι ἡμῶν 1 Here, **spirit** refers to a person’s attitude or emotional state. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:16 aimw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνα Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses **children of God** figuratively to refer to people who have a father-child relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. Here, **children** does not refer to young people, but only to the relationship that people have with their fathers. If you translate **children** using a literal term, choose a word that can refer to people of any age in relation to their fathers. Alternate translation: “God’s spiritual offspring” or “spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:17 agxk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 8:17 izpd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis εἰ & τέκνα, καὶ κληρονόμοι; κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if we are children, then we are also heirs: we are both heirs of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 8:17 hfwo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνα 1 See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:17 fj7w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κληρονόμοι; κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses **heirs** figuratively to refer to Christians as if they will inherit property and wealth from a family member. He means that they will receive everything that God has promised to give Christians. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who will receive what God has promised us: both those who receive those things from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:17 q751 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνκληρονόμοι & Χριστοῦ 1 Paul uses **joint heirs** figuratively to refer to Christians as if they will inherit property and wealth from a family member along with **Christ**. He means that God will give to Christians what he gives to Christ. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we will also receive what God has promised us and Christ together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:17 q6ka rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns συνπάσχομεν, ἵνα καὶ συνδοξασθῶμεν 1 The pronoun **him** here refers to Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we suffering together with Christ so that we may also be glorified together with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 8:17 ggl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 Paul uses **so that** here to state the goal for which Christians **suffer together with** Christ. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 8:17 j6ia rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ συνδοξασθῶμεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God may also glorify us together with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:18 i5nu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in [verses 18–25](../08/18.md) gives further information about what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 8:18 f3sv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns λογίζομαι 1 The pronoun **I** here refers to Paul (see [7:1](../07/01.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, consider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 8:18 b3b1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λογίζομαι & ὅτι οὐκ ἄξια τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ, πρὸς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I cannot compare the sufferings of this present time with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:18 oj49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ & τὴν & δόξαν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sufferings** and **glory**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the things that make us suffer in this present time … the glorious situation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:18 jjb8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μέλλουσαν & ἀποκαλυφθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God will make known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:19 qoj5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that this verse gives additional support for what Paul said in [verse 17](../08/17.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 8:19 dn11 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἡ & ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως & ἀπεκδέχεται 1 Here the phrase **the eager expectation** is an idiom Paul uses to emphasize how **eagerly** **the creation** is waiting. He does not mean that **the eager expectation** itself is waiting. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the creation is very eagerly expecting” or “the creation is eagerly expecting with much eagerness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 8:19 d911 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ & ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως & ἀπεκδέχεται 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the creation** as if it were a person who eagerly expects something. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “it is as if the creation is eagerly expecting with eager expectation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 8:19 ulvv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς κτίσεως & τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **creation** and **revelation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of the created things … the sons of God to be revealed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:19 dm6s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for the time when God will reveal his sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:19 sr2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 14](../08/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:20 nh58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in [verses 20–22](../08/20.md) is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:20 zjl2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ & ματαιότητι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **futility**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to being futile” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:20 gdfe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ κτίσις 1 See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:20 l9ab rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ κτίσις ὑπετάγη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God subjugated the creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:20 yvl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ κτίσις ὑπετάγη, οὐχ ἑκοῦσα 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the creation** as if it were a person who could be **subjected** to someone and could have a will. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “it is as if the creation was subjected against its will” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 8:20 taz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν ὑποτάξαντα 1 This phrase refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who subjected it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:20 l7bf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐφ’ ἑλπίδι 1 Here, **hope** refers to the creation’s **hope**, which is why the creation is “eagerly expecting the revelation of the sons of God” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “on the basis of giving hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:20 tof4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἑλπίδι 1 See how you translated **hope** in [5:4](../05/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:21 m3fi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις ἐλευθερωθήσεται ἀπὸ τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς, εἰς τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **the creation** as if it were a person who was enslaved to someone and needed to be **freed**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the creation itself will no longer decay, but will experience the glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 8:21 l6qc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις ἐλευθερωθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will free the creation itself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:21 ovn5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ κτίσις 1 See how you translated **the creation** in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:21 l3vw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς & τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **slavery**, **decay**, **freedom**, and **glory**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being enslaved to decay … being free to experience what is glorious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:21 r2n9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **slavery** to **decay**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “being enslaved to decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:21 ba5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **decay** as if it could enslave someone. He means that **the creation** was certain to **decay**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being destined to decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:21 tx57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν ἐλευθερίαν 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **freedom** as if it were a location someone could enter **into**. Paul means that **the creation** will experience this **freedom**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience the freedom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:21 bv03 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the freedom** that relates to **the glory**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the freedom that comes from the glory” or “the freedom pertaining to the glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:21 zsks rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δόξης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form **the glory of the children of God** to refer to **the glory** that God shares with believers. This was the same **glory** that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned, as mentioned in [3:23](../03/23.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the glory that God gives the children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:21 a5ix rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν τέκνων τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in the [verse 16](../08/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:22 pcay rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse gives further support for what Paul said about the miserable condition of **the creation** in the previous two verses. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 8:22 l69k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις συνστενάζει καὶ συνωδίνει 1 Here Paul speaks of **the creation** figuratively as if it were a woman who **groans and labors in pain** while giving birth to a baby. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the creation is like a woman groaning and laboring in pain while giving birth” or “all the creation is suffering greatly together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 8:23 b5sz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ Πνεύματος ἔχοντες 1 This clause could refer to: (1) Paul and his Christian readers. Alternate translation: “those who have the firstfruit of the Spirit” (2) the reason why Christians **groan**. Alternate translation: “because we have the firstfruit of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:23 qyic rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the firstfruit** that is **the Spirit**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the firstfruit, that is, the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:23 wutm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν ἀπαρχὴν 1 Here Paul uses **firstfruit** figuratively to refer to the Holy **Spirit** as if it were the first crop that was harvested during the harvest season. Paul means that the Holy **Spirit** is the first part of the blessings that God gives Christians. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:23 xun5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ 2 Paul uses the word **ourselves** here to emphasize that Christians also share in the suffering of the creation. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “our very selves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 8:23 ch9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ἑαυτοῖς στενάζομεν 1 Here Paul uses **groan* figuratively to refer to the the emotional anguish that Christians experience while they wait to be with God in heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience emotional anguish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:23 tiij rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns υἱοθεσίαν & τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν 1 See how you translated the abstract nouns **adoption** in [verse 15](../08/15.md) and **redemption** in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:23 k1wy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit υἱοθεσίαν ἀπεκδεχόμενοι 1 Here, **our adoption** refers to when we will become full members of God’s family, as adopted sons. Alternate translation: “waiting for when we are fully members of God’s family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:23 qsb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τοῦ σώματος ἡμῶν 1 Paul is speaking of the bodies of believers in general, not of one particular body. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of our bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 8:24 oocv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is the reason why Christians “groan” and are “eagerly expecting” to be fully adopted and redeemed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “We do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:24 sv0h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ & ἐλπίδι & ἐλπὶς & ἐλπίς 1 See how you translated the abstract noun **hope** in [5:4](../05/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:24 xwvy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ & ἐλπίδι 1 Here, **in** could indicate: (1) that **hope** is associated with being **saved**. Alternate translation: “in association with this hope” (2) the means by which people are saved. In this case, **hope** would refer to faith. Alternate translation: “by this hope” 8:24 x4gi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐσώθημεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God saved us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:24 edze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βλεπομένη & βλέπει 1 Paul uses **seen** and **sees** figuratively here to refer to experiencing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “being experienced … he experiences” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:24 pgmc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βλεπομένη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people can see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:24 rxxy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is true since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:24 tks9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὃ γὰρ βλέπει τις, ἐλπίζει? 1 Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the trust of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “For surely no one hopes for what he sees!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 8:25 ktqd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃ οὐ βλέπομεν 1 See how you translated the similar use of “seen” and “sees” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:25 g2pm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃ οὐ βλέπομεν & ἀπεκδεχόμεθα 1 Here, **what we do not see** and **it** refer to the “adoption” and “redemption” mentioned in [verse 23](../08/23.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the adoption and redemption that we do not see … we are eagerly expecting these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:25 l91v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δι’ ὑπομονῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **endurance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while enduring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:26 bkwx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis συναντιλαμβάνεται & ὑπερεντυγχάνει 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “helps us … intercedes for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 8:26 h8jy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **weakness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in our weak condition” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:26 a6e1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is true since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:26 k5pn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὸ & τί προσευξώμεθα καθὸ δεῖ, οὐκ οἴδαμεν 2 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For we do not know the thing for which we should pray as we ought” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 8:26 fbjc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸ τὸ Πνεῦμα 1 Paul uses the word **himself** here to emphasize that Holy **Spirit** helps Christians. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 8:26 jmp8 στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις 1 Alternate translation: “with groanings that we cannot express in words” 8:27 tq4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 Here, **the one who searches the hearts** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language,\nyou could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who searches the hearts,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:27 v184 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 The phrase **searches the hearts** means “examines thoughts and emotions.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who knows all our thoughts and feelings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:27 tz5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 See how you translated “heart” in [1:21](../01/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 8:27 bioe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the mindset** that belongs to the **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Spirit’s mindset” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 8:27 rgcb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ φρόνημα 1 See how you translated this abstract noun in [8:6](../08/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:27 fgdd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ Θεὸν 1 Here, **God** implies God’s will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to God’s will” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:28 u0ev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀγαθόν & πρόθεσιν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **good** and **purpose**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is good … what he purposes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:28 q3ce rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς & κλητοῖς οὖσιν 2 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for those whom God called” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:29 m3vv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὓς προέγνω 1 Here, **foreknew** could mean: (1) God had determined to know them ahead of time, which is how this word is used in [1 Peter 1:20](../../1pe/01/20.md). Alternate translation: “whom he chose beforehand” (2) God knew what they would do ahead of time. Alternate translation: “whom he knew beforehand,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:29 xhn2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συμμόρφους τῆς εἰκόνος τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **image** refers to how Christians will one day resemble Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated **image** in [1:23](../01/23.md). Alternate translation: “to be a similar form that is like his Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:29 yuw2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the **Son** of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 8:29 ojxg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς 1 Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 8:29 r3vf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to God’s **Son**, Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 8:29 lf49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ & πρωτότοκον 1 Here, **firstborn** could mean: (1) the most important person among God’s children. Alternate translation: “the person ranked first” (2) the first person to be resurrected. Alternate translation: “the first person to be resurrected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:29 s552 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοῖς 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 8:29 lxym rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοῖς 1 Here, **brothers** refers to Christians, whom Paul calls “joint heirs with Christ” in [verse 17](../08/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “children of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:30 hg3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκάλεσεν & ἐκάλεσεν 1 Here, **called** refers to God choosing people to be his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “chose to be his people … he chose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:30 g29g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture ἐδόξασεν 1 Paul uses the past tense in order to refer to something that will certainly happen in the future. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “will glorify” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 8:31 uqou rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν 1 Here, **then** indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verses. See how you translated this phrase in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:31 xpu3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν πρὸς ταῦτα? εἰ ὁ Θεὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, τίς καθ’ ἡμῶν?
1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in these two sentences to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say to these things: if God is for us, surely no one can be against us!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 8:31 ovfz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 8:31 s21a ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “is on our side” 8:32 fqim rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὅς γε τοῦ ἰδίου Υἱοῦ οὐκ ἐφείσατο, ἀλλὰ ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πάντων παρέδωκεν αὐτόν, πῶς οὐχὶ καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ, τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν χαρίσεται? 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He who indeed did not spare his own Son but gave him up on behalf of us all will surely also with him freely give us all things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 8:32 mifc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὅς 1 **He who** here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 8:32 s9l9 οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 Alternate translation: “did not refrain from giving” or “did not refuse to give up” 8:32 vyjk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, **but** indicates that what follows is a strong contrast from what was said in the previous clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 8:32 l73i rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ ἰδίου Υἱοῦ 1 Here, **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the **Son** of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 8:32 b3au rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρέδωκεν αὐτόν 1 Here, **gave him up** means that God allowed people to kill Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “gave him up to be killed” or “allowed him to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:33 vr1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς ἐγκαλέσει κατὰ ἐκλεκτῶν Θεοῦ? 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can bring an accusation against God’s elect!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 8:33 tidd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τίς ἐγκαλέσει 1 Here, **accusation** implies an **accusation** that is based on facts. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a true accusation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:33 ekqn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκλεκτῶν Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **elect**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have been chosen by God” or “those whom God has elected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:33 qmca rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result Θεὸς ὁ δικαιῶν 1 This sentences states the reason why the idea in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “No on can accuse them because God is the one who justifies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:34 vt5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς ὁ κατακρινῶν? 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can condemn!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 8:34 j1dj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὁ κατακρινῶν 1 Paul is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “the one who condemns us believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 8:34 u627 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ ἀποθανών, μᾶλλον δὲ ἐγερθείς ὅς, καί ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὃς καὶ ἐντυγχάνει ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν 1 This sentences states the reason why the idea in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “No one can condemn because Christ Jesus is the one who died—but more than that, he was raised who also is at the right hand of God—who also intercedes on our behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 8:34 tw3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγερθείς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:34 dea5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγερθείς 1 See how you translated **raised** in [4:25](../04/25.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 8:34 uc9o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the **right** side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 8:34 vd8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅς, καί ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 In this culture, the place at the **right** side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:35 h9ba rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς ἡμᾶς χωρίσει ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Χριστοῦ? 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one will separate us from the love of Christ!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 8:35 btoo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμᾶς χωρίσει ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of **love** as if it were an object that someone can be separated from. He means that **Christ** cannot stop loving those who believe in him. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “will cause Christ to stop loving us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:35 sxyq rc://*/ta/man/translate/litany θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα? 1 Paul uses a repetitive series of words in this sentence to emphasize that nothing can stop Jesus from loving those who believe in him. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of various types of suffering that Christians may endure because of their faith. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone might have to endure. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) 8:35 ldx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα? 1 Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely neither tribulation, nor distress, nor persecution, nor hunger, nor nakedness, nor danger, nor sword!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 8:35 m2hl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα? 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Will tribulation, or distress, or persecution, or hunger, or nakedness, or danger, or sword separate us from the love of Christ?”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 8:35 qe2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **Tribulation**, **distress**, **persecution**, **hunger**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “If people trouble us, or hurt us, or distress us, or persecute us, or cause us to be hungry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:35 q2dc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία 1 **Tribulation** and **distress** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Extreme tribulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 8:35 kcjr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἢ μάχαιρα 1 Here, **sword** refers to being killed violently. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “or being killed violently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 8:36 clec rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Here Paul uses **Just as it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 44:22](../../psa/44/22.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Just as it is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 8:36 f2de rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the sons of Korah. Alternate translation: “just as the sons of Korah wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:36 wegb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ, θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν; ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς 1 In these clauses Paul quotes [Psalm 44:22](../../psa/44/22.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 8:36 t67y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ 1 Here, **your** is singular and refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For your sake, God,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 8:36 s7wj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive θανατούμεθα & ἐλογίσθημεν 1 Here, **we** refers to the people who wrote this verse. It does not refer to God, who is the one being spoken to. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 8:36 phxq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive θανατούμεθα & ἐλογίσθημεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “our enemies put us to death … they consider us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:36 h6v7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 The phrase **all day long** is an exaggeration that emphasizes how frequently these people were being killed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are killed regularly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 8:36 g3pi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς 1 Here Paul compares to **sheep** those whom people kill because they are loyal to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “We are considered by those who kill us to only be as valuable as the sheep they kill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 8:36 gmi0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σφαγῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **slaughter**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:37 wytd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 **But** here indicates that what follows [verses 37–39](../08/37.md) is the negative answer to the rhetorical questions in [verse 35](../08/35.md). If you translated the rhetorical question in [verse 35](../08/35.md) as a question, then here you could use a natural way in your language for introducing a negative answer to that question. If you changed the rhetorical question in [verse 35](../08/35.md) to a statement, then here you could use a word that indicates strong contrast. Alternate translation: “No,” or “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 8:37 aii8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τούτοις 1 Here, **these things** refers to the list of various types of suffering mentioned in [verse 35](../08/35.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these kinds of suffering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:37 iui3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπερνικῶμεν 1 Here, **more than conquerors** refers to those who have complete victory over their enemies. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have complete victory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:37 wcm6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **the one who loved us** could refer to: (1) Christ, as in [verse 35](../08/35.md). Alternate translation: “through Christ, who loved us” (2) God, as in [verse 39](../08/39.md). Alternate translation: “through God, who loved us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:38 fch1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 8:38 dgky rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πέπεισμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God convinced me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:38 nsm2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany οὔτε θάνατος, οὔτε ζωὴ, οὔτε ἄγγελοι, οὔτε ἀρχαὶ, οὔτε ἐνεστῶτα, οὔτε μέλλοντα, οὔτε δυνάμεις 1 Paul uses a repetitive series of words in this verse and the next verse in order to emphasize that nothing can stop God from loving people who believe in Jesus. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of various things in the universe that might cause Christians to suffer. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone might have to endure. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) 8:38 ok7f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θάνατος & ζωὴ & ἀρχαὶ & δυνάμεις 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **death**, **life**, **governments**, or **powers**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being dead … being alive … those who govern … powerful things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 8:38 js9q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀρχαὶ 1 Here, **governments** could refer to: (1) demons, which is usually how Paul uses this word ([1 Corinthians 15:24](../../1co/15/24.md), [Ephesians 6:12](../../eph/06/12.md)). Alternate translation: “ruling demons” (2) human kings and rulers. Alternate translation: “human rulers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:38 q7ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δυνάμεις 1 This could refer to: (1) demons with power, which is how Paul uses this word in [1 Corinthians 15:24](../../1co/15/24.md) and [Ephesians 1:21](../../eph/01/21.md). Alternate translation: “demonic powers” (2) human beings with power. Alternate translation: “powerful people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 8:39 fdxl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany οὔτε ὕψωμα, οὔτε βάθος, οὔτε τις κτίσις ἑτέρα 1 These two phrases are the end of a repetitive series of words that Paul began in the previous verse in order to emphasize that nothing can stop God from loving those who believe in Jesus. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone might have to endure. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) 8:39 ppaz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὕψωμα & βάθος 1 Here, **height** refers to everything that exists above a person, and **depth** refers to everything that exists below a person. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that is above us … everything that is below us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 8:39 ajct rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τις κτίσις ἑτέρα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “any other thing that God has created” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 8:39 sd7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δυνήσεται ἡμᾶς χωρίσαι ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 35](../08/35.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 8:39 fr5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **which** marks that Paul is giving further information about **the love of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “that is, the love of God in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 8:39 tot5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in [6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 9:intro w6f4 0 # Romans 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n6. God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36)\n * Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5)\n * God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13)\n * God shows mercy on whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18)\n * No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33)\n\nIn this chapter, Paul changes what he is teaching about. In Chapters 9-11, he focuses on the nation of Israel.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Flesh\n\nPaul uses the word “flesh” in this chapter only to refer to Israelites, people physically descending from Abraham through Jacob, who God named Israel. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])\n\nIn other chapters, Paul uses the word “brother” to mean fellow Christians. However, in this chapter, he uses “my brothers” to mean his kinsmen the Israelites.\n\nPaul refers to those who believe in Jesus as “children of God” and “children of the promise.”\n\n### Predestination\n\nMany scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n### Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Stone of stumbling\n\nPaul explains that while some Gentiles accepted Jesus as their savior by believing in him, most Jews were trying to earn their salvation and so rejected Jesus. Paul, quoting the Old Testament, describes Jesus as a stone that the Jews stumble over when walking. This “stone of stumbling” causes them to “fall.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “It is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel”\n\nPaul uses the word “Israel” in this verse with two different meanings. The first “Israel” means the physical descendants of Abraham through Jacob. The second “Israel” means those who are God’s people through faith. The UST reflects this. 9:1 b89f Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul tells of his personal desire that the people of the nation of Israel will be saved. Then he emphasizes the different ways in which God has prepared them to believe. 9:1 yg93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι 1 These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is telling the truth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 9:1 h9mp συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς μου ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit controls my conscience and confirms what I say” 9:2 jx3a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὅτι λύπη μοί ἐστιν μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη τῇ καρδίᾳ μου 1 Here, **unceasing pain in my heart** is an idiom that Paul uses to share his emotional distress. Alternate translation: “I tell you that I grieve very greatly and deeply” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 9:2 jky1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet λύπη & μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη 1 These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them together to emphasize how great his emotions are. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 9:3 rh5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ηὐχόμην γὰρ ἀνάθεμα εἶναι αὐτὸς, ἐγὼ ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “I personally would be willing to let God curse me and, keep me apart from Christ forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 9:3 eg9b τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. 9:4 p1ys οἵτινές εἰσιν Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Alternate translation: “who, like me, are Israelites” 9:4 l6vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὧν ἡ υἱοθεσία 1 Here Paul uses the metaphor of **adoption** to indicate that the Israelites are like God’s children. Alternate translation: “who have God as their father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 9:6 s2ma Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul emphasizes that those who are born in the family of Israel can really only be a true part of Israel through faith. 9:6 equ8 οὐχ οἷον δὲ, ὅτι ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “But God has not failed to keep his promises” or “But God has kept his promises” 9:6 wy8z οὐ γὰρ πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἰσραήλ οὗτοι, Ἰσραήλ 1 God did not make his promises to all the physical descendants of **Israel** (or Jacob), but to his spiritual descendants, that is, those who trust in Jesus. 9:7 s3rj οὐδ’ ὅτι εἰσὶν σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ πάντες τέκνα 1 Alternate translation: “Nor are they all children of God just because they are Abraham’s descendants” 9:8 s5xa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκὸς, 1 Here, **children of the flesh** is a metonym that refers to the physical descendants of Abraham. Alternate translation: “all of Abraham’s descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 9:8 y17u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in the [verse 16](../08/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 9:8 ta8t τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 The phrase **children of the promise** refers to people who will inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. 9:9 up57 ἐπαγγελίας & ὁ λόγος οὗτος 1 Alternate translation: “these are the words God used when he made the promise” 9:9 wqb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός 1 You can translate this in an active form to express that God will give a son to Sarah. Alternate translation: “I will give Sarah a son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 9:10 mb5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 Paul refers to Isaac as **our father** because Isaac was the ancestor of Paul and of the Jewish believers in Rome. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 9:10 icc1 κοίτην, ἔχουσα 1 Alternate translation: “had become pregnant” 9:11 h16y μήπω γὰρ γεννηθέντων, μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον 1 Alternate translation: “before the children were born and before they had done anything, whether good or bad” 9:11 a1gz ἵνα ἡ κατ’ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις τοῦ Θεοῦ μένῃ 1 Alternate translation: “so that what God wants to happen according to His choice will happen” 9:11 eez1 μήπω γὰρ γεννηθέντων 1 Alternate translation: “before the children were born” 9:11 iw56 μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον 1 Alternate translation: “not because of anything they had done” 9:12 ze3m Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIt may be necessary in your language to place this verse between verse 10 and verse 11: “our father Isaac, it was said to her, ‘The older will serve the younger.’ Now the children were not yet born and had not yet done anything good or bad, but so that the purpose of God according to choice might stand—not because of actions, but because of him who calls. It is just” 9:12 d6mr ἐκ τοῦ 1 because of God 9:12 wv7n ἐρρέθη αὐτῇ, ὅτι ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι 1 Alternate translation: “God said to Rebecca, ‘The older son will serve the younger son’” 9:13 xt7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole τὸν Ἰακὼβ ἠγάπησα, τὸν δὲ Ἠσαῦ ἐμίσησα 1 The word **hated** is an exaggeration. God **loved** **Jacob** much more than he loved **Esau**. He did not literally hate Esau. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 9:14 m8xk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? 1 Paul is using the question to get the attention of his readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 9:14 s1hm μὴ γένοιτο! 1 “That is not possible!” or “Certainly not!” This expression strongly denies that this could happen. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. 9:15 kq2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ Μωϋσεῖ γὰρ λέγει 1 Paul speaks about God’s talking with **Moses** as if it is being done in the present time. Alternate translation: “For God said to Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 9:16 d4f5 οὐ τοῦ θέλοντος, οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος 1 Alternate translation: “it is not because of what people want or because they try hard” 9:16 ues3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος 1 Paul speaks of a person who does good things in order to gain God’s favor as if that person were running a race. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 9:17 x1cj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφὴ 1 Here the **scripture** is personified as if God were talking to Pharaoh. Alternate translation: “For the scripture records that God said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 9:17 xu7s ἐξήγειρά σε & ἐνδείξωμαι & μου 1 Here the pronouns **I** and **my** refer to God as the speaker. 9:17 nfv5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you σε 1 Here, **you** is singular and refers to Pharaoh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 9:17 pz5x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐξήγειρά σε 1 Here, **raised** is an idiom for causing something to be what it is. Alternate translation: “I made you the powerful man that you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 9:17 gps5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “so that people might proclaim my name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 9:17 jp6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 Here, **name** is a metonym that could refer to: (1) God in all of his being. Alternate translation: “who I am” (2) God’s reputation. Alternate translation: “how great I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 9:17 jn7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ 1 “wherever there are people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 9:18 a1uv ὃν δὲ θέλει, σκληρύνει 1 God makes stubborn whoever he wishes to make stubborn. 9:19 z4j2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ἐρεῖς μοι οὖν 1 Paul is talking to the critics of his teaching as though he were only talking to one person. You may need to use the plural here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 9:19 bbe4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἔτι μέμφεται? τῷ γὰρ βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν? 1 These rhetorical questions are complaints against God. You can translate them as strong statements. Alternate translation: “He should not find fault with us. No one has ever been able to withstand his will.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 9:19 hqr7 μέμφεται & αὐτοῦ 1 The words **he** and **his** here refer to God. 9:19 n1ti τῷ & βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν 1 Alternate translation: “who has ever stopped him from doing what he wanted to do” 9:20 arw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως? 1 Paul uses the potter’s right to make any kind of container he wants from the clay as a metaphor for the creator’s right to do whatever he wants with his creation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 9:20 knb3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως? 1 Paul asks questions to emphasize his point. You can translate this as a strong statement. Alternate translation: “What a person has molded should never say to the one who molds it, ‘Why did you make me this way?’!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 9:20 wcj3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως 1 This question is a rebuke and can be translated as a strong statement. Alternate translation: “You should not have made me this way!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 9:21 e94a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ οὐκ ἔχει ἐξουσίαν ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος ποιῆσαι ὃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος, ὃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν? 1 This rhetorical question is a rebuke. Alternate translation: “The potter certainly has the right over the clay to make from the same lump a container for special occasions, but another for daily use.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 9:22 we86 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκεύη ὀργῆς 1 Paul speaks of people as if they were **containers**. Alternate translation: “people who deserve wrath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 9:23 ufj7 γνωρίσῃ & αὐτοῦ 1 The pronouns **he** and **his** here refer to God. 9:23 v33r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκεύη ἐλέους 1 Paul speaks of people as if they were **containers**. Alternate translation: “people who deserve mercy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 9:23 she3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν πλοῦτον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ 1 Paul compares God’s wonderful actions here to great **riches**. Alternate translation: “his glory, which is of great value, upon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 9:23 t41s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἃ προητοίμασεν εἰς δόξαν 1 Here, **glory** refers to life in heaven with God. Alternate translation: “whom he prepared ahead of time in order that they might live with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 9:24 y6vp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καὶ & ἡμᾶς 1 The pronoun **us** here refers to Paul and fellow believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 9:24 t8rn ἐκάλεσεν 1 Here, **called** means God has appointed or chosen people to be his children, to be his servants and proclaimers of his message of salvation through Jesus. 9:25 eqc2 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIn this section Paul explains how Israel’s unbelief as a nation was told ahead of time by the prophet Hosea. 9:25 ewb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ Ὡσηὲ λέγει 1 Here, **he** refers to God. Alternate translation: “As God says also in the book that Hosea wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 9:25 m82v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῷ Ὡσηὲ 1 **Hosea** was an Old Testament prophet. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 9:25 gi5k καλέσω τὸν οὐ λαόν μου, λαόν μου 1 Alternate translation: “I will choose for my people those who were not my people” 9:25 yy15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην 1 Here, **the one** refers to Hosea’s wife, Gomer, who represents the nation of Israel. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “I will choose her whom I did not love to be one whom I love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 9:26 qe9f υἱοὶ Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 The word **living** may refer to the fact that God is the only true God, and not like the false idols. Alternate translation: “children of the true God” 9:27 zqi1 κράζει 1 Alternate translation: “calls out” 9:27 k9j8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης 1 Here Paul compares the number of the people of Israel to the number of grains of **sand** in the **sea**. Alternate translation: “too many to count” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 9:27 wig1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθήσεται 1 Paul uses the word **saved** in a spiritual sense. If God saves a person, it means that through believing in Jesus’ death on the cross, God has forgiven him and rescued him from being punished for his sin. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will save” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 9:28 cm32 λόγον & ποιήσει Κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 Here, **word** refers to how he has decided to punish people. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish people on the earth according to how he has said” 9:29 dl9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν & ἂν ἐγενήθημεν 1 Here the pronouns **us** and **we** refer to Isaiah and those to whom he spoke. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 9:29 tk2e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν 1 God killed all of the people of Sodom and Gomorrah because of their sin. Alternate translation: “we all would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom and Gomorrah” or “God would have destroyed all of us, like he destroyed the cities of Sodom and Gommorah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 9:30 m5l2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? 1 Paul uses this question to get the attention of his readers. Alternate translation: “This is what we must say.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 9:30 ki4k ὅτι ἔθνη 1 Alternate translation: “We will say that the Gentiles” 9:30 bnl6 τὰ μὴ διώκοντα δικαιοσύνην 1 Alternate translation: “who were not trying to please God” 9:30 gl4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δικαιοσύνην & τὴν ἐκ πίστεως 1 Here, **by faith** refers to placing one’s trust in Christ. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “because God made them right with him when they trusted in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 9:31 f18n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς νόμον οὐκ ἔφθασεν 1 This means that the Israelites could not please God by trying to keep **the law**. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “were not able to please God by keeping the law because they could not keep it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 9:32 y4pf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis διὰ τί? 1 This is an ellipsis. You can include the implied words in your translation. Alternate translation: “Why could they not attain righteousness?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 9:32 e7p7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion διὰ τί? 1 Paul asks this question to get the attention of his readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 9:32 j5jp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ἐξ ἔργων 1 This refers to things that people do to try to please God. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “by trying to do things that would please God” or “by keeping the Law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 9:33 kx9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς γέγραπται 1 You can indicate that Isaiah wrote this. Alternate translation: “just as it has been written by Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 9:33 ivt3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “as Isaiah the prophet wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 9:33 dy6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν Σιὼν 1 Here, **Zion** is a metonym that represents Israel. Alternate translation: “in Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 9:33 u3dj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου 1 Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 9:33 mf6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου 1 These phrases are metaphors that refer to Jesus and his death on the cross. It was as if the people stumbled over a stone because they were disgusted when they considered Jesus’ death on the cross. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 9:33 tu4i πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 Because the stone stands for a person, you may need to translate this as “who believes in him.” 10:intro c2li 0 # Romans 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n6. God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36)\n * Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5)\n * God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13)\n * God shows mercy on whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18)\n * No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33)\n * Israel’s false righteousness (10:1–4)\n * Salvation is available to everyone (10:5–21)\n\nSome translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 8.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 18-20 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### God’s righteousness\n\nPaul teaches here that while many Jews earnestly tried to be righteous, they did not succeed. We cannot earn God’s righteousness. God gives us Jesus’ righteousness when we believe in him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nPaul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He does this to convince his readers that God does not save only the Hebrew people, so Christians must be ready to go and share the gospel with the whole world. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “I will provoke you to jealousy by what is not a nation”\n\nPaul uses this prophecy to explain that God will use the church to make the Hebrew people jealous. This is so they will seek God and believe the gospel. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/jealous]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:1 pi37 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul continues stating his desire for Israel to believe but emphasizes that both those who are Jews as well as everyone else can only be saved by faith in Jesus. 10:1 hj4b ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women. 10:1 tq7k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ μὲν εὐδοκία τῆς ἐμῆς καρδίας 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s emotions or inner being. Alternate translation: “my greatest desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 10:1 tmf2 ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Alternate translation: “is that God will save the Jews” 10:2 y7qg μαρτυρῶ & αὐτοῖς 1 Alternate translation: “I declare truthfully about them” 10:3 bw97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀγνοοῦντες γὰρ τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην 1 Here, **righteousness** refers to the way God puts people right with himself. You can make this explicit in the translation. Alternate translation: “For they do not know how God puts people right with himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:3 a6r4 τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑπετάγησαν 1 Alternate translation: “they did not accept God’s way of putting people right with himself” 10:4 x1w8 τέλος γὰρ νόμου Χριστὸς 1 Alternate translation: “For Christ completely fulfilled the law” 10:4 f6pu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς δικαιοσύνην παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι 1 Here, **believes** means “trusts.” Alternate translation: “in order that he may make everyone who trusts in him right before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:5 qby2 τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου 1 Alternate translation: “how the law makes a person right before God” 10:5 wjn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτι ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ἄνθρωπος, ζήσεται ἐν αὐτῇ 1 In order to be made right with God through the law, a person would have to keep the law perfectly, which is not possible. Alternate translation: “The person who perfectly obeys the law will live because the law will make him right before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:5 qkz4 ζήσεται 1 Here, **will live** could refer to: (1) eternal life. (2) mortal life in fellowship with God. 10:6 sr9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ δὲ ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη οὕτως λέγει 1 Here, **righteousness** is described as a person who can speak. Alternate translation: “But Moses writes this about how faith makes a person right before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 10:6 x7h4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου 1 Moses was addressing the people as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronoun **your** is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 10:6 nwlw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “Do not say to yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 10:6 tf9r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς ἀναβήσεται εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν? 1 Moses uses a question to teach his audience. His previous instruction of, “Do not say” requires a negative answer to this question. You can translate this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one is able to go up to heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 10:6 gi7s τοῦτ’ ἔστιν Χριστὸν καταγαγεῖν 1 Alternate translation: “in order that they might have Christ come down to earth” 10:7 w8xe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς καταβήσεται εἰς τὴν Ἄβυσσον? 1 Moses uses a question to teach his audience. His previous instruction of, “Do not say” requires a negative answer to this question. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “No person can go down and enter the place where the spirits of dead persons are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 10:7 iw13 ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 From among all those who have died. This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. 10:7 t8dd νεκρῶν 1 Here, **the dead** speaks of physical death. 10:8 gz7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀλλὰ τί λέγει? 1 The word **it** refers to “the righteousness” of [Romans 10:6](../10/06.md). Here Paul describes righteousness as a person who can speak. Alternate translation: “But this is what Moses says?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 10:8 sen1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἀλλὰ τί λέγει? 1 Paul uses a question to emphasize the answer he is about to give. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 10:8 kzb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν 1 Paul speaks of God’s word as if it were a person who can move. Alternate translation: “You have heard the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 10:8 y6mq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου 1 The word **mouth** is a metonym that refers to what a person says. Alternate translation: “You can hear and know how to speak and think about God’s message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 10:8 zvx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου 1 The phrase **in your heart** is metonym that refers to what a person thinks and believes. Alternate translation: “and you know what it means” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 10:8 lh5d τὸ ῥῆμα τῆς πίστεως 1 Alternate translation: “God’s message that tells us that we must believe in him” 10:9 tz7r ἐὰν ὁμολογήσῃς ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, Κύριον Ἰησοῦν 1 Alternate translation: “if you verbally confess that Jesus is Lord” 10:9 ie71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πιστεύσῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner person. Alternate translation: “believe in your mind” or “truly believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 10:9 zdf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom αὐτὸν ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 Here, **raised** here is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 10:9 c3cq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 10:10 g7i1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καρδίᾳ γὰρ πιστεύεται εἰς δικαιοσύνην, στόματι δὲ ὁμολογεῖται εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym that represents the mind or will. Alternate translation: “For it is with the mind that a person trusts and is right before God, and it is with the mouth that a person confesses and God saves him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 10:10 xs8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche στόματι 1 Here, **mouth** is a synecdoche that represents a person’s capacity to speak. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 10:11 gu99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφή 1 Paul speaks of the scripture as if it were alive and had a voice. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 10:11 r6tf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφή 1 You can make explicit who wrote the scripture that Paul uses here. Alternate translation: “For Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:11 nv71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται 1 This is equivalent to: “Everyone who does not believe will be shamed.” The negative is used here for emphasis. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will honor everyone who believes in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 10:12 z8p4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ γάρ ἐστιν διαστολὴ Ἰουδαίου τε καὶ Ἕλληνος 1 Paul implies that God will treat all people the same. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “In this way, God treats the Jews and the non-Jews the same” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:12 p9py rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πλουτῶν εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους αὐτόν 1 Here, **being rich** means that God blesses richly. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “and he richly blesses all who trust in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:13 pe96 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πᾶς γὰρ ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται 1 Here the word **name** is a metonym for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 10:13 js1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πᾶς γὰρ ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For the Lord will save everyone who trusts in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 10:14 utr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς οὖν ἐπικαλέσωνται εἰς ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν? 1 Paul uses a question to emphasize the importance of taking the good news of Christ to those who have not heard. The word **they** refers to those who do not yet belong to God. Alternate translation: “Those who do not believe in God cannot call on him!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 10:14 lx52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς & πιστεύσωσιν οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν? 2 Paul uses another question for the same reason. Alternate translation: “they cannot believe in him if they have not heard his message!” or “they cannot believe in him if they have not heard the message about him!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 10:14 mrl8 πιστεύσωσιν 1 Here this means to acknowledge that what that person has said is true. 10:14 iwc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς & ἀκούσωσιν χωρὶς κηρύσσοντος? 3 Paul uses another question for the same reason. Alternate translation: “they cannot hear the message if someone does not tell them!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 10:15 e8rt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες τῶν εὐαγγελιζομένων τὰ ἀγαθά! 1 Paul uses **feet** to represent those who travel and bring the message to those who have not heard it. Alternate translation: “It is wonderful when messengers come and tell us the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 10:16 hku8 οὐ πάντες ὑπήκουσαν 1 Here, **them** refers to the Jews. “not all of the Jews obeyed” 10:16 j3se rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν? 1 Paul is using this question to emphasize that Isaiah prophesied in the Scriptures that many Jews would not believe in Jesus. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “Lord, so many of them do not believe our message.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 10:16 z4s9 τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our** refers to God and Isaiah. 10:17 wu5a ἡ πίστις ἐξ ἀκοῆς 1 Here, **faith** refers to “believing in Christ” 10:17 nq87 ἡ & ἀκοὴ διὰ ῥήματος Χριστοῦ 2 Alternate translation: “hearing by listening to the message about Christ” 10:18 f6jy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν? μενοῦνγε 1 Paul uses a question for emphasis. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “But, I say the Jews certainly have heard the message about Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 10:18 s5zh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν 1 Both of these statements mean basically the same thing and Paul uses them for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 10:18 g4vd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν 1 The word **their** refers to the sun, moon, and stars. Here they are described as human messengers that tell people about God. This refers to how their existence shows God’s power and glory. Alternate translation: “The sun, moon, and the stars are proof of God’s power and glory, and everyone in the world sees them and knows the truth about God.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 10:18 lz77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν 1 You can make explicit that Paul is quoting Scripture here. Alternate translation: “As the Scriptures record, ‘The sun, moon, and the stars are proof of God’s power and glory, and everyone in the world sees them and knows the truth about God.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:19 ib4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω? 1 Paul uses a question for emphasis. Alternate translation: “Again I tell you that Israel did know the message.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 10:19 zyw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀλλὰ λέγω, μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω? 1 The word **Israel** is a metonym for the people who lived in the nation of Israel. Alternate translation: “Again I tell you the people of Israel did know the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 10:19 jjt3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρῶτος Μωϋσῆς λέγει 1 This means that Moses wrote down what God said. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:19 vxzz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς, & παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς 1 Both instances of **I** refer to God, and **you** refers to the Israelites. Alternate translation: “God will provoke you … God will stir you up to anger.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 10:19 ve6t ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει 1 Alternate translation: “by those you do not consider to be a real nation” or “by people who do not belong to any nation” 10:19 s3nz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπ’ ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ 1 Here, **without understanding** means that the people do not know God. Alternate translation: “by a nation with people who do not know me or my commands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 10:19 g7zt παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς 1 Alternate translation: “I will make you angry” or “I will cause you to become angry” 10:19 a7k7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμᾶς 1 Here, **you** refers to the nation of Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 10:20 qcx2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nHere the words **I**, “me,” and “my” refer to God. 10:20 cv1x Ἠσαΐας δὲ ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει 1 This means the prophet **Isaiah** wrote what God had said. 10:20 fc4b εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν 1 Prophets often speak of things in the future as if they have already happened. This emphasizes that the prophecy will certainly come true. 10:20 u60f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Even though the Gentile people will not look for me, they will find me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 10:20 t78j ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην 1 Alternate translation: “I made myself known” 10:20 k8pp λέγει 1 **He** refers to God, who is speaking through Isaiah. 10:21 hw4w ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 This phrase is used to emphasize God’s continual effort. “Continually” 10:21 il8s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα 1 The action of reaching out a hand represents offering help to a person. Alternate translation: “I tried to welcome you and to help you, but you refused my help and continued to disobey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) 11:intro e9qz 0 # Romans 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n6. God’s plan for Israel (9:1–11:36)\n * Paul’s sorrow for Israel’s unbelief (9:1–5)\n * God chooses whom he wants to choose (9:6–13)\n * God shows mercy on whom he wants to show mercy (9:14–18)\n * No one can question God’s choice (9:19–33)\n * Israel’s false righteousness (10:1–4)\n * Salvation is available to everyone (10:5–21)\n * Israel has a faithful remnant (11:1–10)\n * Israel’s unbelief resulted in non-Jews’ belief (11:11–24)\n * God will save Israel (11:15–32)\n * Praise for God’s wisdom (11:33–11:36)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-10, 26-27, and 34-35, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Grafting\n\nPaul uses the image of “grafting” to refer to the place of the Gentiles and Jews in the plans of God. Making one plant to be permanently part of another plant is called “grafting.” Paul uses the picture of God grafting the Gentiles as a wild branch into his saving plans. But God has not forgotten about the Jews, who are spoken of as the natural plant. God will also save Jews who believe in Jesus.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “Did God reject his people? May it never be”\n\nWhether Israel (the physical descendants of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob) has a future in the plans of God, or if they have been replaced in the plans of God by the church, is a major theological issue in Chapters 9-11. This phrase is an important part of this section of Romans. It seems to indicate that Israel remains distinct from the church. Not all scholars arrive at this conclusion. Despite their currently rejecting Jesus as their Messiah, Israel has not exhausted the grace and mercy of God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]]) 11:1 p2h9 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThough Israel as a nation has rejected God, God wants them to understand salvation comes by grace without works. 11:1 wp35 λέγω οὖν 1 Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say then” 11:1 p4zd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ ἀπώσατο ὁ Θεὸς τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ? 1 Paul asks this question so that he can answer the questions of other Jews who are upset that God has included the Gentiles among his people, while the hearts of the Jewish people have been hardened. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 11:1 wqu2 μὴ γένοιτο 1 “That is not possible!” or “Certainly not!” This expression strongly denies that this could happen. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. See how you translated this in [Romans 9:14](../09/14.md). 11:1 bc4g φυλῆς Βενιαμείν 1 This refers to the **tribe** descended from **Benjamin**, one of the 12 tribes into which God divided the people of Israel. 11:2 h4qe ὃν προέγνω 1 Alternate translation: “whom he knew ahead of time” 11:2 cjp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ? 1 You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you know what the Scriptures record about when Elijah pleaded with God against Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 11:2 dd1e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή 1 Paul is referring to the **scriptures** as if they were able to speak. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 11:3 fh9i ἀπέκτειναν 1 Here, **they** refers to the people of Israel. 11:3 ut1s κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος 1 The pronoun **I** here refers to Elijah. 11:3 dv5u ζητοῦσιν τὴν ψυχήν μου 1 Alternate translation: “they want to kill me” 11:4 rj4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἀλλὰ τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός? 1 Paul is using this question to bring the reader to his next point. Alternate translation: “How does God answer him?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 11:4 x6e9 αὐτῷ 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Elijah. 11:5 ce2r λῖμμα 1 Here this means a small part of people whom God chose to receive his grace. 11:6 q6es rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰ δὲ χάριτι 1 Paul continues to explain how God’s mercy works. Alternate translation: “But since God’s mercy works by grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 11:7 k94b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί οὖν? 1 “What should we conclude?” Paul asks this question to move his reader to his next point. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “This is what we need to remember.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 11:8 uc8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα κατανύξεως, ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν 1 This is a metaphor about the fact that the people are spiritually dull. They are not able to **hear** or receive spiritual truth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:8 z47a πνεῦμα κατανύξεως 1 Here, **spirit** means “the characteristics of,” such as the “spirit of wisdom.” 11:8 zyk1 ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν 1 The concept of seeing with one’s **eyes** was considered to be equivalent to gaining understanding. 11:8 ny8w ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν 1 The concept of hearing with the **ears** was considered to be equivalent to obedience. 11:9 kpg8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν 1 Here, **table** here is a metonym that represents feasting. Alternate translation: “Please, God, make their feasts become like a trap” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 11:9 l6re rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν 1 Here, **net** and **trap** are metaphors that represent punishment. Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:9 x0wl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Please, God, make their feasts like a trap that catches them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 11:9 ya1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκάνδαλον 1 A **stumbling block** is anything that causes a person to trip so that he falls down. Here it represents something that tempts a person to sin. Alternate translation: “something that tempts them to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:9 xex5 ἀνταπόδομα αὐτοῖς 1 Alternate translation: “something that allows you to take revenge on them” 11:10 c1nj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον 1 Here, **make their backs bend** is a metonym for forcing slaves to carry heavy loads on their backs. Alternate translation: “make them continually carry heavy loads” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 11:10 biqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον 1 This is a metaphor for making them suffer. Alternate translation: “make them continually suffer like people carrying heavy loads” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:11 z8tw Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nWith Israel as a nation rejecting God, Paul warns the Gentiles to be careful they do not make the same mistake. 11:11 r9hg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ ἔπταισαν ἵνα πέσωσιν? 1 Paul uses this question to add emphasis. Alternate translation: “Has God rejected them forever because they sinned?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 11:11 qbx4 μὴ γένοιτο! 1 “That is not possible!” or “Certainly not!” This expression strongly denies that this could happen. You may have a similar expression in your language that you could use here. See how you translated this in [Romans 9:14](../09/14.md). 11:11 f1jw παραζηλῶσαι αὐτούς 1 See how you translated this phrase in [Romans 10:19](../10/19.md). 11:12 ew4i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet εἰ & τὸ παράπτωμα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος κόσμου, καὶ τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν 1 Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. If you need to, you can combine them in your translation. Alternate translation: “when the Jews failed spiritually, the result was that God abundantly blessed the non-Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 11:12 dh1g πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν 1 Because the Jews rejected Christ, God richly blessed the **Gentiles** by giving them the opportunity to receive Christ. 11:12 it9k κόσμου 1 Here the **world** is a metonym that refers to the people who live in the world, especially the Gentiles. 11:14 ua2k παραζηλώσω 1 See how you translated this phrase in [Romans 10:19](../10/19.md). 11:14 h1qe μου τὴν σάρκα 1 This refers to Paul’s fellow Jews. 11:14 gp38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ σώσω τινὰς ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 God will save those who believe. Alternate translation: “and perhaps some will believe and God will save them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 11:15 es22 εἰ γὰρ ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν καταλλαγὴ κόσμου 1 Alternate translation: “For if because God rejected them, he will reconcile the rest of the **world** to himself” 11:15 ui3i ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **their** refers to Jewish unbelievers. 11:15 m3fs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κόσμου 1 Here, **the world** is a metonym for the people who live in the world. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 11:15 em8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις εἰ μὴ ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν? 1 Paul asks this question to emphasize that when God accepts the Jews, it will be a wonderful thing. Alternate translation: “how will it be when God accepts them? It will be like they have come back to life from among the dead!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 11:15 civ7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις εἰ μὴ ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν? 1 You can translate it in an active form. Alternate translation: “then when God accepts them, it will be like they have died and become alive again!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 11:15 jn4l νεκρῶν 1 These words speak of all **dead** people together in the underworld. 11:16 b2s5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀπαρχὴ ἁγία, καὶ τὸ φύραμα; 1 Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the first grain or **firstfruits** to be harvested. He is also speaking of the Israelites who are descendants of those men as if they were a **lump of dough** that they made from the grain. Alternate translation: “If Abraham is counted as the first of what has been offered to God, all of our ancestors who followed should also be counted as God’s possession” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:16 dci1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ ἡ ῥίζα ἁγία, καὶ οἱ κλάδοι 1 Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the **root** of a tree, and the Israelites who are descendants of those men, as if they were the **branches** of the tree. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:16 d1zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἁγία 1 The people always dedicated to God the first crops that they harvested. Here, “firstfruits” stands for the first people to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:17 slf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ δέ τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν 1 Here Paul refers to the Jews who rejected Jesus as **branches** that were **broken off**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:17 b8ic rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰ δέ τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “But if someone broke off some of the branches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 11:17 qv65 σὺ δὲ ἀγριέλαιος ὢν 1 The pronoun **you**, and the phrase **a wild olive branch**, refer to the Gentile people who have accepted salvation through Jesus. 11:17 z6hr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνεκεντρίσθης ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 Here Paul speaks of the Gentile Christians as if they were **grafted** into the faith of Abraham and the Jewish patriarchs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:17 lb1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνεκεντρίσθης ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God attached you to the tree among the remaining branches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 11:17 s9w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς ῥίζης τῆς πιότητος τῆς ἐλαίας ἐγένου 1 Here, **the richness of the root** is a metaphor that refers to the promises of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:18 gqd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ κατακαυχῶ τῶν κλάδων 1 Here, **the branches** is a metaphor that stands for the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “do not say you are better than the Jewish people God has rejected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:18 llz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ σὺ τὴν ῥίζαν βαστάζεις, ἀλλὰ ἡ ῥίζα σέ 1 Again Paul implies that the Gentile believers are branches that are connected to the **root** of the faith of the Abraham and the Jewish patriarchs. God saves them only because of the covenant promises that he made to the Jews. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:19 mm6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι 1 **Branches** here refer to the Jews who rejected Jesus and whom God has now rejected. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:19 qk8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God broke branches off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 11:19 p9ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ 1 Paul uses this phrase to refer to the Gentile believers whom God has accepted. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:19 z9l9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “he might attach me in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 11:20 puj9 τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ ἐξεκλάσθησαν 1 The pronouns **They** and **their** refer to the Jewish people who did not believe. 11:20 v2ua rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σὺ δὲ τῇ πίστει ἕστηκας 1 Paul speaks of the Gentile believers remaining faithful as if they were standing **firm** and no one could move them. Alternate translation: “but you remain because of your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:21 f6i7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν κατὰ φύσιν κλάδων οὐκ ἐφείσατο, οὐδὲ σοῦ φείσεται 1 Here the **natural branches** refer to the Jewish people who rejected Jesus. Alternate translation: “Since God did not spare those unbelieving Jews, who grew up like a tree’s natural branches that came from the root, then know, if you do not believe, he will not spare you either” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:22 xdm3 χρηστότητα καὶ ἀποτομίαν Θεοῦ 1 Paul is reminding the Gentile believers that although God may act very kindly toward them, he will not hesitate to judge and punish them. 11:22 p691 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ μὲν τοὺς πεσόντας, ἀποτομία; ἐπὶ δὲ σὲ, χρηστότης Θεοῦ 1 This can be restated to remove the abstract nouns **severity** and **kindness**. Alternate translation: “God dealt harshly with the Jews who fell, but God acts kindly toward you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 11:22 scf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς πεσόντας 1 Doing what is wrong is spoken of as if it is falling down. Alternate translation: “the Jews who have done wrong” or “the Jews who have refused to trust in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:22 z41m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐὰν ἐπιμένῃς τῇ χρηστότητι 1 This can be restated to remove the abstract noun **kindness**. Alternate translation: “if you continue doing what is right so that he continues being kind to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 11:22 t4mk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπεὶ καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ 1 Paul again uses the metaphor of a branch, which God can **cut off** if he needs to. Here, **cut off** is a metaphor for rejecting someone. Alternate translation: “Otherwise you will be rejected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:22 l17i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπεὶ καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Otherwise God will cut you off” or “Otherwise God will reject you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 11:23 lvk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ 1 The phrase **do not continue in their unbelief** is a double negative. You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “if the Jews start believing in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 11:23 zu7k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνκεντρισθήσονται 1 Paul speaks of the Jews as if they were branches that could be **grafted** back into a tree if they start to believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:23 lx11 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνκεντρισθήσονται 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will graft them back in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 11:23 yjj6 ἐνκεντρίσαι 1 This is a common process where the end of a live branch of one tree is inserted into another tree so that the new branch will continue to grow in that tree. 11:23 r5kg κἀκεῖνοι & αὐτούς 1 The occurrences of **they** and **them** refer to the Jews. 11:24 s1a4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ γὰρ σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου, καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ἐνεκεντρίσθης εἰς καλλιέλαιον, πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ 1 Paul continues speaking of the Gentile believers and Jews as if they were branches of a tree. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:24 dem3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰ γὰρ σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου, καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ἐνεκεντρίσθης εἰς καλλιέλαιον, πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ? 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For if God had cut you out of what is by nature a wild olive tree, and contrary to nature had grafted you into a good olive tree, how much more will he graft these Jews, who are the natural branches, into their own olive tree?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 11:24 yn21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ κατὰ φύσιν 1 Paul continues speaking of the Jews and Gentiles as if they were branches. The branches **according to nature** represent the Jews who were originally connected to the faith of Abraham and the Jewish patriarchs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:25 ye5w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ & θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 Here Paul uses a double negative. You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “I very much want you to be aware” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 11:25 w7lx ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women. 11:25 q3i2 θέλω 1 Here the pronoun **I** refers to Paul. 11:25 sf4v ὑμᾶς & ἦτε & ἑαυτοῖς 1 The pronouns **you** and **yourselves** refer to the Gentile believers. 11:25 me1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι 1 Paul does not want the Gentile believers to think they are wiser than the Jewish unbelievers. Alternate translation: “so that you will not think you are wiser than you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 11:25 ec4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πώρωσις ἀπὸ μέρους τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γέγονεν 1 Paul speaks of stubbornness as if it were a **hardening** of physical organs in the body. Some Jews have refused to accept salvation through Jesus. Alternate translation: “many people of Israel continue to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:25 db1x ἄχρι οὗ τὸ πλήρωμα τῶν ἐθνῶν εἰσέλθῃ 1 The word **until** here implies that a portion Jews will refuse to believe until after God has finished bringing the **Gentiles** into the church. 11:26 ds7a Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul says that a deliverer will come out of Israel to the glory of God. 11:26 vu7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ οὕτως πᾶς Ἰσραὴλ σωθήσεται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and thus God will save all Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 11:26 n7yf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “just as the scriptures record” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 11:26 dm4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ Σιὼν 1 Here, **Zion** is used as a metonym for the place where God dwells. Alternate translation: “From where God is among the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 11:26 v96c ὁ ῥυόμενος 1 Alternate translation: “the one who brings his people to safety” 11:26 at55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποστρέψει ἀσεβείας 1 Paul speaks of **ungodliness** as if it were an object that someone could remove, perhaps like someone removes a garment. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:26 bkr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀπὸ Ἰακώβ 1 Here, **Jacob** is used as a metonym for Israel. Alternate translation: “from the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 11:27 ll39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀφέλωμαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul speaks of **sins** as if they were objects that someone could take away. Alternate translation: “I will remove the burden of their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:28 ctn9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ μὲν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 You can make explicit why Paul mentions the **gospel**. Alternate translation: “Because the Jews rejected the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 11:28 x6aa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐχθροὶ δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 You can make explicit whose **enemies** they are, and how this was for the Gentiles’ sake. Alternate translation: “they are God’s enemies for your sake” or “God has treated them as enemies in order that you also might hear the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 11:28 dr2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ & τὴν ἐκλογὴν 2 You can make explicit why Paul mentions **election**. Alternate translation: “because God has elected the Jews” or “because God has chosen the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 11:28 jas2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀγαπητοὶ διὰ τοὺς πατέρας 1 You can make explicit who loves the Jews and why Paul mentions **their forefathers**. Alternate translation: “they are loved by God because of what he promised to do for their ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 11:28 d82k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀγαπητοὶ διὰ τοὺς πατέρας 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God still loves them because of what he promised to do for their ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 11:29 p2sf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀμεταμέλητα γὰρ τὰ χαρίσματα καὶ ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul speaks of the spiritual and material blessings that God promised to give his people as if they were **gifts**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:29 mnqs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀμεταμέλητα γὰρ τὰ χαρίσματα καὶ ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The call of God refers to the fact that God called the Jews to be his people. Alternate translation: “For God never changed his mind about what he has promised to give them, and about how he has called them to be his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 11:30 bj8g ὑμεῖς ποτε ἠπειθήσατε 1 Alternate translation: “you did not obey in the past” 11:30 df91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἠλεήθητε τῇ τούτων ἀπειθείᾳ 1 Here, **mercy** means God’s undeserved blessings. Alternate translation: “because the Jews have rejected Jesus, you have received blessings that you did not deserve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 11:30 g3cn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 Here, **you** refers to Gentile believers, and is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 11:32 t6cb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνέκλεισεν & ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς πάντας εἰς ἀπείθειαν 1 God has treated people who disobey him like prisoners who are unable to escape from prison. Alternate translation: “God has made prisoners of those who disobey him. Now they cannot stop disobeying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 11:33 x3kb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὦ βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ 1 Here, **wisdom** and **knowledge** mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “How amazing are the many benefits of both God’s wisdom and knowledge!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 11:33 u322 ὡς ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “We are completely unable to understand the things that he has decided and find out the ways in which he acts toward us” 11:34 r2wj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο? 1 Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one is as wise as the Lord. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one has ever known the mind of the Lord, and no one has become his advisor.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 11:34 yy52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy νοῦν Κυρίου 1 Here, **mind** is a metonym for knowing things or thinking about things. Alternate translation: “all that the Lord knows” or “what the Lord thinks about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 11:35 j5cn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ? 1 Paul uses this question to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “No one has ever given anything to God that he did not first receive from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 11:36 abc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐξ αὐτοῦ, καὶ δι’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἰς αὐτὸν, τὰ πάντα. αὐτῷ 1 Here, all occurrences of **him** refer to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 11:36 rpx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας 1 This expresses Paul’s desire for all people to honor God. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “May all people honor him forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 12:intro aky9 0 # Romans 12 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)\n * How to act toward God (12:1–2)\n * How to serve the church (12:3–8)\n * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)\n * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)\n * How to act toward government (13:1–7)\n * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)\n * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)\n * Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12)\n * Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23)\n * Be united with other Christians (15:1–13)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 20, which are from the Old Testament.\n\nMany scholars believe Paul uses the word **therefore** in [Romans 12:1](../rom/12/01.md) to refer back to all of Chapters 1-11. Having carefully explained the Christian gospel, Paul now explains how Christians should live in light of these great truths. Chapters 12-16 focus on living out one’s Christian faith. Paul uses many different commands in these chapters to give these practical instructions. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Christian living\n\nUnder the law of Moses, people were required to offer temple sacrifices of animals or grain. Now Christians are required to live their lives as a type of sacrifice to God. Physical sacrifices are no longer required. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Body of Christ\n\nThe body of Christ is an important metaphor or image used in Scripture to refer to the church. Each church member plays a unique and important function. Christians need each other. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 12:1 rhs3 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul tells what the life of a believer should be and how believers should serve. 12:1 d2y3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, διὰ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **brothers** refers to fellow believers, both male and female. Alternate translation: “Fellow believers, because of the great mercy that God has given you I very much want you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 12:1 w1mz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν 1 Here Paul uses the word **bodies** to refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God as a living sacrifice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 12:1 wuyl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν 1 Paul is comparing a believer in Christ who completely obeys God to the animals that the Jews killed and then offered to God. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God while you are alive as if you were a dead sacrifice on a temple altar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 12:1 dwr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἁγίαν, εὐάρεστον, τῷ Θεῷ 1 This could refer to: (1) a sacrifice that you give to God alone and that pleases him. (2) a sacrifice that is **acceptable** to God because it is morally pure. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 12:1 tyk7 τὴν λογικὴν λατρείαν ὑμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “which is the right way to worship God” 12:2 clc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ 1 This could mean: (1) do not behave as the world behaves. (2) do not think the way the world does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 12:2 pyb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “do not act and think like the world does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 12:2 d2qq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ 1 Here, **this world** refers to unbelievers who live in the world. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 12:2 na8p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀλλὰ μεταμορφοῦσθε τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ νοός 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “but let God change the way you think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 12:3 nyc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι 1 Here, **grace** refers to God’s choosing Paul to be an apostle and leader of the church. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “through the grace that caused me to become an apostle” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 12:3 l6c6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “because God freely chose me to be an apostle” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 12:3 s6yg παντὶ τῷ ὄντι ἐν ὑμῖν, μὴ ὑπερφρονεῖν παρ’ ὃ δεῖ φρονεῖν 1 Alternate translation: “that no one among you should think they are better than they are” 12:3 me4t ἀλλὰ φρονεῖν εἰς τὸ σωφρονεῖν 1 Alternate translation: “but you should be wise in how you think about yourselves” 12:3 m8z7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Θεὸς ἐμέρισεν μέτρον πίστεως 1 Paul implies here that believers have different abilities that correspond to their **faith** in God. Alternate translation: “since God has given each of you the faith to trust in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 12:4 zm8p γὰρ 1 Paul the word **For** to show that he will now explain why some Christians should not think they are better than others. 12:4 v2pi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, πολλὰ μέλη ἔχομεν 1 Paul refers to all the believers in Christ as if they were different parts of the human **body**. He does this to illustrate that although believers may serve Christ in different ways, each person belongs to Christ and serves in an important way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 12:4 v5iy μέλη 1 Here, **members** are such things as eyes, stomachs, and hands. 12:5 dhx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ δὲ καθ’ εἷς ἀλλήλων μέλη 1 Paul speaks of the believers as if God had physically joined them together like the parts of the human body. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 12:5 cutl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ δὲ καθ’ εἷς ἀλλήλων μέλη 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God has joined each believer together with all other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 12:6 hrr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔχοντες δὲ χαρίσματα κατὰ τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν διάφορα 1 Paul speaks of believers’ different abilities as being free gifts from God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 12:6 y267 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἔχοντες δὲ χαρίσματα κατὰ τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν διάφορα 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God has freely given each of us the ability to do different things for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 12:6 bnk9 κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν τῆς πίστεως 1 This could mean: (1) he should speak prophecies that do not go beyond the amount of faith God has given us. (2) he should speak prophecies that agree with the teachings of our faith. 12:8 m2as rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ μεταδιδοὺς 1 Here, **giving** refers to giving money and other things to people. You can make this meaning explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “if one has the gift of giving money or other goods to people in need” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 12:9 iv5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ ἀγάπη ἀνυπόκριτος 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “You must love people sincerely and truly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 12:9 eaw7 ἡ ἀγάπη 1 The word Paul uses here refers to the kind of love that comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself. 12:10 mr8i τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ 1 This is another word that means brotherly **love** or love for a friend or family member. This is natural human love between friends or relatives. 12:10 ng86 τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ & φιλόστοργοι 1 Here Paul begins a list of nine items, each of the form **in … be** to tell the believers what kind of people they should be. You may need to translate some of the items as “in … do.” The list continues to [Romans 12:13](../12/13.md). 12:10 ux2y τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ 1 Alternate translation: “as for how you love your fellow believers” 12:10 tj57 τῇ τιμῇ ἀλλήλους προηγούμενοι 1 Alternate translation: “honor and respect one another” or “honor your fellow believers by respecting them” 12:11 iu2i τῇ σπουδῇ μὴ ὀκνηροί, τῷ πνεύματι ζέοντες, τῷ Κυρίῳ δουλεύοντες 1 Alternate translation: “do not be lazy in your duty, but be eager to follow the Spirit and to serve the Lord” 12:12 l3es τῇ θλίψει ὑπομένοντες 1 Alternate translation: “wait patiently whenever you have troubles” 12:13 vk5h ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων κοινωνοῦντες 1 Alternate translation: “when fellow Christians are in trouble, help them with what they need” 12:13 exd8 τὴν φιλοξενίαν διώκοντες 1 This is the last item in the list that began in [Romans 12:9](../12/09.md). “always welcome them into your home when they need a place to stay” 12:16 hwd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὸ αὐτὸ εἰς ἀλλήλους φρονοῦντες 1 This is an idiom that means to live in unity. Alternate translation: “agreeing with one another” or “living in unity with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 12:16 ar7y μὴ τὰ ὑψηλὰ φρονοῦντες 1 Alternate translation: “do not think that you are more important than others” 12:16 cc23 τοῖς ταπεινοῖς συναπαγόμενοι 1 Alternate translation: “welcome people who do not seem important” 12:16 h469 μὴ γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς 1 Alternate translation: “Do not think of yourselves as having more wisdom than everyone else” 12:17 h2tz μηδενὶ κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόντες 1 Alternate translation: “do not do evil things to someone who has done evil things to you” 12:17 fzh8 προνοούμενοι καλὰ ἐνώπιον πάντων ἀνθρώπων 1 Alternate translation: “do things that everyone considers to be good” 12:18 pgt7 τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν, μετὰ πάντων ἀνθρώπων εἰρηνεύοντες 1 Alternate translation: “do whatever you can to live in peace with everyone” 12:19 ew6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δότε τόπον τῇ ὀργῇ 1 Here, **wrath** is a metonym for God’s punishment. Alternate translation: “allow God to punish them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 12:19 ns3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γέγραπται γάρ 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone has written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 12:19 l2i8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that God will avenge his people. Alternate translation: “I will certainly avenge you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 12:20 c4ig rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὁ ἐχθρός σου & σωρεύσεις 1 The pronouns **your** and **you** are singular and addressed as to one person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 12:20 q7dq ἀλλὰ ἐὰν πεινᾷ ὁ ἐχθρός σου, ψώμιζε αὐτόν; ἐὰν διψᾷ, πότιζε αὐτόν; τοῦτο γὰρ ποιῶν, ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ. 1 In 12:20 Paul quotes another part of scripture. Alternate translation: “But the scripture also says, ‘If your enemy is hungry, feed him. If he is thirsty, give him a drink. For doing this, you will heap coals of fire on his head’” 12:20 wce6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ 1 Paul speaks of the blessings that the enemies will receive as if someone were pouring hot **coals** on their heads. This could mean: (1) you will make the person who harmed you feel badly about how he has mistreated you. (2) you will give God a reason to judge your enemy more harshly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 12:21 q761 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ τὸ κακόν 1 Paul describes **evil** as though it were a person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 12:21 k8et rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Do not let those who are evil defeat you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 12:21 p7fd μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα & τὸ κακόν 1 These verbs are addressed as to one person and so are singular. 13:intro l4q7 0 # Romans 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)\n * How to act toward God (12:1–2)\n * How to serve the church (12:3–8)\n * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)\n * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)\n * How to act toward government (13:1–7)\n * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)\n * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)\n\nIn the first part of this chapter, Paul teaches Christians to obey rulers who govern them. At that time, ungodly Roman rulers governed the land. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Ungodly rulers\n\nWhen Paul teaches about obeying rulers, some readers will find this difficult to understand, especially in places where rulers persecute the church. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God, unless the rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do. There are times when a believer must submit to these rulers and suffer at their hands. Christians understand that this world is temporary and they will ultimately be with God forever. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Flesh\n\nThis is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) 13:1 v5ik Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul tells believers how to live under their rulers. 13:1 b8nf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche πᾶσα ψυχὴ & ὑποτασσέσθω 1 Here, **soul** is a synecdoche for the whole person. “Let every Christian obey” or “Everyone should obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 13:1 g1by ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις 1 Alternate translation: “submit to government officials” 13:1 wii2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ & ἔστιν ἐξουσία, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ Θεοῦ 1 This is a double negative. You can translate it in a positive form. Alternate translation: “all authority comes from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 13:1 j3lr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αἱ δὲ οὖσαι ὑπὸ Θεοῦ τεταγμέναι εἰσίν 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “And the people who are in authority are there because God put them there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 13:2 ui8y τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ 1 Alternate translation: “that government authority” or “the authority that God placed in power” 13:2 dsa3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ & ἀνθεστηκότες, ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will judge those who oppose government authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 13:3 m3yf γὰρ 1 Paul uses this word to begin his explanation of [Romans 13:2](../13/02.md) and to tell about what will result if the government condemns a person. 13:3 c2xa οἱ & ἄρχοντες οὐκ εἰσὶν φόβος 1 Rulers do not make good people afraid. 13:3 jt2z τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ, & τῷ κακῷ 1 People are identified with their **good deeds** or **evil deeds**. 13:3 z4sq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion θέλεις δὲ μὴ φοβεῖσθαι τὴν ἐξουσίαν? 1 Paul uses this question to get people to think about what they need to do in order not to be afraid of rulers. Alternate translation: “Let me tell you how you can be unafraid of the ruler.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 13:3 ahl9 ἕξεις ἔπαινον ἐξ αὐτῆς 1 The government will say good things about people who do what is good. 13:4 ink8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ & εἰκῇ τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ 1 You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “he carries the sword for a very good reason” or “he has the power to punish people, and he will punish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 13:4 s3vz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ 1 Roman governors carried a short **sword** as a symbol of their authority. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 13:4 au7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔκδικος εἰς ὀργὴν 1 Here, **wrath** represents the punishment people receive when they do evil deeds. Alternate translation: “a person who punishes people as an expression of the government’s anger against evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 13:5 q81v οὐ μόνον διὰ τὴν ὀργὴν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 Alternate translation: “not only so the government will not punish you, but also so you will have a clear conscience before God” 13:6 r1jy διὰ τοῦτο 1 Alternate translation: “because the government punishes evildoers” 13:6 r4b3 τελεῖτε 1 Paul is addressing the believers here, so this verb is plural. 13:6 hy4f γὰρ & εἰσιν 2 Alternate translation: “This is why you should pay taxes: authorities are” 13:7 z9cn ἀπόδοτε πᾶσι 1 Paul is addressing the believers here, so this verb is plural. 13:7 wg2l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τῷ τὸν φόρον, τὸν φόρον; τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος; τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν 1 The word “pay” is understood from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “pay tax to whom tax is due and toll to whom toll is due. Pay fear to whom fear is due and honor to him to whom honor is due” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 13:7 nwi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν 1 Here paying **fear** and **honor** is a metaphor for fearing and honoring those who deserve to be feared and honored. Alternate translation: “Fear those who deserve to be feared, and honor those who deserved to be honored” or “Respect those whom you ought to respect, and honor those whom you ought to honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 13:7 s2nf τὸ τέλος 1 This is a kind of tax. 13:8 s8pb Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul tells believers how to act toward neighbors. 13:8 a69g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε, εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν 1 This is a double negative. You can translate it in a positive form. Alternate translation: “Pay all you owe to everyone, and fulfill your obligation to love one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 13:8 ay3n εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν 1 This is the one debt that can remain. 13:8 p6cw ὀφείλετε 1 This verb is plural and applies to all the Christians in Rome. 13:8 i5au ἀγαπᾶν 1 This refers to the kind of **love** that comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself. 13:10 vy62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον κακὸν οὐκ ἐργάζεται 1 This phrase portrays love as a person who is being kind to other people. Alternate translation: “People who love their neighbors do not harm them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 13:11 b6l3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰδότες τὸν καιρόν, ὅτι ὥρα ἤδη ὑμᾶς ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι 1 Paul speaks of the need for the Roman believers to change their behavior as if they needed to wake up from being asleep. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 13:12 ahn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ νὺξ προέκοψεν 1 Paul speaks of the time when people do evil deeds as **night**. Alternate translation: “The sinful time is almost over” or “It is as though the night is almost finished” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 13:12 p7xp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ & ἡμέρα ἤγγικεν 2 Paul speaks of the time when people do what is right as the **day**. Alternate translation: “the time of righteousness will begin soon” or “it is as though it will soon be day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 13:12 bb8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποθώμεθα οὖν τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους 1 Paul speaks of **works of darkness** as if they are clothing that a person puts aside. Here to **put aside** means to stop doing something. Here, **darkness** is a metaphor for evil. Alternate translation: “Let us therefore stop doing the evil things that people do in the dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 13:12 y5n4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνδυσώμεθα & τὰ ὅπλα τοῦ φωτός 1 Here, **light** is a metaphor for what is good and right. Paul speaks of doing what is right as if it were putting on armor to protect one’s self. Alternate translation: “let us start doing what is right. Doing this will protect us from what is evil like armor protects a solider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 13:13 gv4q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive περιπατήσωμεν 1 Paul includes his readers and other believers with himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 13:13 e6ij rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ εὐσχημόνως περιπατήσωμεν 1 Paul speaks of living as true believers as if one were walking while it is **day**. Alternate translation: “Let us walk in a visible way knowing that everyone can see us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 13:13 qes3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις 1 These concepts mean basically the same thing. You can combine them in your translation. Alternate translation: “in sexually immoral acts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 13:13 h6xl ἔριδι 1 This refers to plotting against and arguing with other people. 13:14 sir6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνδύσασθε τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν 1 Paul speaks of accepting the moral nature of Christ as if he were our outer clothing that people can see. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 13:14 j795 ἐνδύσασθε 1 If your language has a plural form for commands, use it here. 13:14 xre7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς σαρκὸς πρόνοιαν μὴ ποιεῖσθε 1 Here the **flesh** refers to the self-directed nature of people who oppose God. This is the sinful nature of human beings. Alternate translation: “do not allow your old evil heart any opportunity at all for doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 14:intro kt8c 0 # Romans 14 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)\n * How to act toward God (12:1–2)\n * How to serve the church (12:3–8)\n * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)\n * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)\n * How to act toward government (13:1–7)\n * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)\n * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)\n * Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12)\n * Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 11 of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Weak in faith\n\nPaul teaches that Christians can have real faith and at the same time be “weak in faith” in a given situation. This describes Christians whose faith is immature, not strong, or misunderstood. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n### Dietary restrictions\n\nMany religions in the ancient Near East restricted what was eaten. Christians have freedom to eat what they want. But they need to use this freedom wisely, in a way that honors the Lord and does not cause others to sin. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### The judgment seat of God\n\nThe judgment seat of God or Christ represents a time when all people, including Christians, will be held accountable for the way they lived their lives. 14:1 abm6 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul encourages believers to remember that they are answerable to God. 14:1 jf8v ἀσθενοῦντα τῇ πίστει 1 This refers to those who felt guilty over eating and drinking certain things. 14:1 p697 μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “and do not condemn them for their opinions” 14:2 ii8g ὃς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα 1 Some people believe God permits them to eat any kind of food. 14:2 n2n6 ὁ & ἀσθενῶν λάχανα ἐσθίει 1 This describes a person who believes God does not want him to eat meat. 14:4 q9bx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ κρίνων ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην? 1 Paul is using a question to scold those who are judging others. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “You are not God, and you are not allowed to judge one of his servants!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 14:4 xq7r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you σὺ & ὁ κρίνων 1 The form of **you** here is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 14:4 ba38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ ἰδίῳ κυρίῳ στήκει ἢ πίπτει 1 Paul speaks of God as if he were a **master** who owned slaves. Alternate translation: “Only the master can decide if he will accept the slave or not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 14:4 cp9y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν 1 Paul speaks of the servant who is acceptable to God as if he were being **made to stand** instead of falling. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 14:4 ucto rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “But the Lord will accept him because he is able to make the servant acceptable” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 14:5 x7j2 ὃς μὲν κρίνει ἡμέραν παρ’ ἡμέραν; ὃς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν. 1 Alternate translation: “One person thinks one day is more important than all the others, but another person thinks that all days are the same” 14:5 m511 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω 1 You can make the full meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “Let each person be convinced that he is honoring the Lord by what he does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 14:5 y5ea rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Let each person be sure what he is doing is to honor the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 14:6 pfn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ φρονῶν τὴν ἡμέραν, Κυρίῳ φρονεῖ 1 Here, **observes** refers to worshiping. Alternate translation: “The person who worships on a certain day does it to honor the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 14:6 esu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὁ ἐσθίων 1 The word “everything” is understood from [Romans 14:3](../14/03.md). It can be repeatd here. Alternate translation: “the person who eats every kind of food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 14:6 f9tm Κυρίῳ ἐσθίει 1 Alternate translation: “eats to honor the Lord” or “eats that way in order to honor the Lord” 14:6 jh8j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ὁ μὴ ἐσθίων 1 The word “everything” is understood from [Romans 14:3](../14/03.md). It can be repeated here. Alternate translation: “and he who does not eat everything” or “and the person who does not eat certain kinds of food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 14:7 txm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐδεὶς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἑαυτῷ ζῇ 1 Here, **lives for himself** means to live only to please oneself. Alternate translation: “None of us should live merely to please ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 14:7 u9ar rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οὐδεὶς & ἡμῶν 1 Paul is including his readers, so this is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 14:7 c9ls rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐδεὶς ἑαυτῷ ἀποθνῄσκει 1 This means anyone’s death affects other people. Alternate translation: “none of us should think that when we die, it affects only us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 14:8 s3lb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul is speaking of both himself and his readers, so all instances of “we” are inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 14:10 db9a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί κρίνεις τὸν ἀδελφόν σου? ἢ καὶ σὺ τί ἐξουθενεῖς τὸν ἀδελφόν σου? 1 By using these questions, Paul is demonstrating how he might need to scold individuals among his readers. Alternate translation: “it is wrong for you to judge your brother, and it is wrong for you to despise your brother!” or “stop judging and despising your brother!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 14:10 al55 τὸν ἀδελφόν 1 Here, **brother** means a fellow Christian, male or female. 14:10 jq85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πάντες γὰρ παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The **judgment seat** refers to God’s authority to judge. Alternate translation: “For God will judge us all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 14:11 fel6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γέγραπται γάρ 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For someone has written in the scriptures:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 14:11 tf76 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ζῶ ἐγώ 1 This phrase is used to start an oath or solemn promise. Alternate translation: “You can be certain that this is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 14:11 sb6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ 1 Paul uses the word **God** and **tongue** to refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “every person will bow and give praise to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 14:11 vngp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ 1 The Lord uses the word **God** to refer to himself. Alternate translation: “every person will bow and give praise to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 14:12 nsy8 περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, λόγον δώσει τῷ Θεῷ 1 Alternate translation: “will have to explain our actions to God” 14:13 ia62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀλλὰ τοῦτο κρίνατε μᾶλλον, τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ ἢ σκάνδαλον 1 Here, **stumbling block** and **snare** mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “but instead make it your goal not to do or say anything that might cause a fellow believer to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 14:13 cx4s τῷ ἀδελφῷ 1 Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian, male or female. 14:14 t7gc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet οἶδα καὶ πέπεισμαι ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here the words **know** and **am persuaded** mean basically the same thing; Paul uses them to emphasize his certainty. Alternate translation: “I am certain because of my relationship with the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 14:14 fuk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐδὲν κοινὸν δι’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 You can translate this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “everything by itself is clean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 14:14 mjc5 δι’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “by its nature” or “because of what it is” 14:14 w3gg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰ μὴ τῷ λογιζομένῳ τι κοινὸν εἶναι, ἐκείνῳ κοινόν 1 Paul implies here that a person should stay away from anything that he thinks is unclean. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “but if a person thinks something is unclean, then for that person it is unclean and he should stay away from it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 14:15 iw7w εἰ & διὰ βρῶμα, ὁ ἀδελφός σου λυπεῖται 1 “If you hurt your fellow believer’s faith over the matter of food.” Here the word **your** refers to those who are strong in faith and **brother** refers to those who are weak in faith. 14:15 ln42 ὁ ἀδελφός 1 Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian, male or female. 14:15 bj8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκέτι κατὰ ἀγάπην περιπατεῖς 1 Paul speaks of the behavior of believers as if it were a walk. Alternate translation: “then you are no longer showing love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 14:16 gl48 μὴ βλασφημείσθω οὖν ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν 1 Alternate translation: “If someone else thinks that something is evil, do not do it, even if you consider it to be good” 14:17 j92k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ βρῶσις καὶ πόσις, ἀλλὰ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ χαρὰ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 Paul argues that God set up his **kingdom** so he could give us a right relationship with himself, and to provide peace and joy. Alternate translation: “For God did not set up his kingdom so that he could rule over what we eat and drink. He set up his kingdom so we could have a right relationship with him, and so he could give us peace and joy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 14:18 am8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δόκιμος τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “people will approve of him” or “people will respect him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 14:19 i3rv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης διώκωμεν, καὶ τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τῆς εἰς ἀλλήλους 1 Here, **build up one another** refers to helping each other grow in faith. Alternate translation: “let us seek to live peacefully together and help one another grow stronger in faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 14:20 p65h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ ἕνεκεν βρώματος, κατάλυε τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 You can make explicit the full meaning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “Do not undo what God has done for a fellow believer just because you want to eat a certain kind of food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 14:20 dk72 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀλλὰ κακὸν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τῷ διὰ προσκόμματος ἐσθίοντι 1 Here a **stumbling block** is a food that a weaker brother eats despite thinking it is wrong, and thereby goes against his conscience. Alternate translation: “but it would be a sin for someone to eat food, which another brother thinks is wrong to eat, if by eating this causes the weaker brother to do something that is against his conscience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 14:21 mrr4 καλὸν τὸ μὴ φαγεῖν κρέα, μηδὲ πιεῖν οἶνον, μηδὲ ἐν ᾧ ὁ ἀδελφός σου προσκόπτει 1 Alternate translation: “It is better not to eat meat or drink wine or do anything else that might cause your brother to sin” 14:21 iq9g ὁ ἀδελφός 1 Here, **brother** refers to a fellow Christian, male or female. 14:21 e1du rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you σου 1 Here, **you** is singular and stresses the responsibility of each individual believer for his fellow believer. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 14:22 hjk9 σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις 1 Here, **faith** refers back to the beliefs about food and drink. 14:22 b3hi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you σὺ & σεαυτὸν 1 Here, **you** and **yourself** are singular. Because Paul is addressing the believers, you may have to translate this using plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 14:22 r53r μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει 1 Alternate translation: “Blessed are those who do not feel guilty for what they decide to do” 14:23 s1ph rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ δὲ διακρινόμενος, ἐὰν φάγῃ, κατακέκριται 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will say that the person does wrong if he is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but he eats it anyway” or “The person who is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but then eats it anyway will have a troubled conscience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 14:23 yr44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτι οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως 1 Anything that is **not from faith** is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “God will say that he is wrong because he is eating something he believes God does not want him to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 14:23 tr9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πᾶν δὲ ὃ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως, ἁμαρτία ἐστίν 1 Anything that is **not from faith** is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “you are sinning if you do something that you do not believe God wants you to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:intro ae9u 0 # Romans 15 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n7. Instructions for living as Christians (12:1–15:13)\n * How to act toward God (12:1–2)\n * How to serve the church (12:3–8)\n * How to act toward other Christians (12:9–13)\n * How to act toward unbelievers (12:14–21)\n * How to act toward government (13:1–7)\n * How to act toward other people (13:8–10)\n * Act as if the end is near (13:11–14)\n * Do not judge other Christians (14:1–12)\n * Do not tempt other Christians to sin (14:13–23)\n * Be united with other Christians (15:1–13)\n8. Conclusion (15:14–16:27)\n * Paul describes his mission (15:14–21)\n * Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-11 and 21 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\nSome translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 12.\n\nIn [Romans 15:14](../rom/15/14.md), Paul begins to speak more personally. He shifts from teaching to telling of his personal plans.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Strong/Weak\n\nThese terms are used to refer to people who are mature and immature in their faith. Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) 15:1 cx66 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul concludes this section about believers’ living for others with reminding them how Christ lived. 15:1 u19s δὲ 1 Translate this using the words your language uses to introduce a new idea into an argument. 15:1 u73x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡμεῖς, οἱ δυνατοὶ 1 Here, **strong** refers to the people who are strong in their faith. They believe that God allows them to eat any kind of food. Alternate translation: “we who are strong in faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:1 dx9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 This refers to Paul, his readers, and other believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 15:1 cv61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν ἀδυνάτων 1 Here, **the weak** refers to the people who are weak in their faith. They believe that God does not allow them to eat some kinds of food. Alternate translation: “those who are weak in faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:2 z2k8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρὸς οἰκοδομήν 1 By this, Paul means to strengthen someone’s faith. Alternate translation: “to strengthen his faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:3 y6fe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “someone wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 15:3 bcz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Here Paul refers to a scripture where Christ (the Messiah) speaks to God. Alternate translation: “the Messiah said to God in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:3 qni7 οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδιζόντων σε, ἐπέπεσαν ἐπ’ ἐμέ 1 The insults of those who insulted God fell on Christ. 15:4 txd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅσα γὰρ προεγράφη, εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν διδασκαλίαν ἐγράφη 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For in times past, the prophets wrote everything in the Scriptures to teach us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 15:4 m7yy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμετέραν & ἔχωμεν 1 Paul includes his readers and other believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 15:4 g6r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν, τὴν ἐλπίδα ἔχωμεν 1 Here, **have hope** means that the believers will know that God will fulfill his promises. You can make explicit the full meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “In this way the scriptures will encourage us to expect that God will do for us everything that he has promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:5 u2zm Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul encourages the believers to remember that both Gentile believers and Jews that believe are made one in Christ. 15:5 g5xm Θεὸς & δῴη 1 Alternate translation: “I pray that … God … will grant” 15:5 ws7q τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν ἐν ἀλλήλοις 1 Alternate translation: “to be in agreement with each other” or “to be united” 15:6 uz1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ἑνὶ στόματι, δοξάζητε 1 This means to be united in praising God. Alternate translation: “praise God together in unity as if only one mouth were speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 15:7 z941 προσλαμβάνεσθε ἀλλήλους 1 Alternate translation: “accept one another” 15:8 gbh8 λέγω γὰρ 1 The pronoun **I** refers to Paul. 15:8 k4my rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Χριστὸν διάκονον γεγενῆσθαι περιτομῆς 1 Here, **the circumcision** is a metonym that refers to the Jews. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ has been made a servant of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 15:8 r0gd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Χριστὸν διάκονον γεγενῆσθαι περιτομῆς 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ has become a servant of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 15:8 me1e εἰς τὸ βεβαιῶσαι τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 This is one of the two purposes for which Christ became a servant of the circumcision. 15:8 gu7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων 1 Here, **the fathers** refers to the ancestors of the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the promises to the ancestors of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:8 dxz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων 1 You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “the promises that God gave to the ancestors of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 15:9 k5q7 τὰ δὲ ἔθνη, ὑπὲρ ἐλέους δοξάσαι τὸν Θεόν 1 This is the second reason for which Christ became a servant of the circumcision. Alternate translation: “and in order that the Gentiles might glorify God for his mercy” 15:9 xgc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “as someone has written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 15:9 em5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ ὀνόματί σου ψαλῶ 1 Here, **your name** is a metonym that refers to God. Alternate translation: “sing praise to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 15:10 yvy9 καὶ πάλιν λέγει 1 Alternate translation: “And again the scripture says” 15:10 x4kg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 This refers to God’s **people**. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “with the people of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:11 xw7t ἐπαινεσάτωσαν αὐτὸν 1 Alternate translation: “let … praise the Lord” 15:12 fta5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί 1 **Jesse** was the physical father of King David. Alternate translation: “descendant of Jesse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 15:12 i4nn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπ’ αὐτῷ ἔθνη ἐλπιοῦσιν 1 Here, **him** refers to the descendant of Jesse, the Messiah. Those who are not Jews will also trust him to fulfill his promises. Alternate translation: “the people who are not Jews can trust him to do what he has promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:13 w7wn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πληρώσαι ὑμᾶς πάσης χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης 1 Paul exaggerates here to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “may … fill you with great joy and peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 15:14 h98x Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul reminds the believers in Rome that God chose him to reach the Gentiles. 15:14 qfs6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πέπεισμαι & ἀδελφοί μου, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐγὼ περὶ ὑμῶν 1 Paul is quite sure that the believers in Rome are honoring each other in their behavior. Alternate translation: “I myself am completely sure that you yourselves have acted toward others in a completely good way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:14 d878 ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women. 15:14 qhv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πεπληρωμένοι πάσης γνώσεως 1 Paul exaggerates here to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “having been filled with sufficient knowledge to follow God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 15:14 ge2l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δυνάμενοι καὶ ἀλλήλους νουθετεῖν 1 Here, to **exhort** means to teach. Alternate translation: “also able to teach each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:15 n2gr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul speaks of **grace** as if it were a physical gift that **God** had **given** him. God had appointed Paul and apostle even though he had persecuted believers before he decided to follow Jesus. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “the grace that God gave me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 15:16 wiw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γένηται ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν εὐπρόσδεκτος 1 Paul speaks of his preaching the gospel as if he, as a priest, were making an **offering** to God. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles might please God when they obey him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 15:18 lu97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ γὰρ τολμήσω τι λαλεῖν, ὧν οὐ κατειργάσατο Χριστὸς δι’ ἐμοῦ, εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ 1 You can translate this double negative in a positive form. Alternate translation: “For the sake of the obedience of the Gentiles, I will only speak of what Christ has accomplished through me in my words and actions and by the power of signs and wonders through the power of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 15:18 by9s εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν 1 Alternate translation: “so that the Gentiles will obey God” 15:18 xds3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ 1 Here, **word and deed** refers to what Christ has accomplished through Paul. Alternate translation: “through me in my words and actions” or “the things that Christ has accomplished through what I have said and done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:19 g8bk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet σημείων καὶ τεράτων 1 These two words mean basically the same thing and refer to various kinds of miracles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 15:19 c8ff ὥστε & ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ καὶ κύκλῳ μέχρι τοῦ Ἰλλυρικοῦ 1 This is from the city of **Jerusalem** as far as the province of **Illyricum**, a region close to Italy. 15:20 x9xm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὕτως δὲ φιλοτιμούμενον εὐαγγελίζεσθαι, οὐχ ὅπου ὠνομάσθη Χριστός 1 Paul only wants to preach to people who have never heard of Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of this, I want to preach the good news in places where people have never heard of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:20 kt3r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ ἐπ’ ἀλλότριον θεμέλιον οἰκοδομῶ 1 Paul speaks of his ministry work as if he were building a house on a **foundation**. Alternate translation: “in order that I might not be simply continuing the work that someone else already started. I do not want to be like a man who builds a house on someone else’s foundation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 15:21 rb5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Here Paul refers to what Isaiah wrote in the scriptures. You can make the meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “what is happening is like what was written by Isaiah in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:21 wy8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 You can translate this in an active form and make the meaning explicit. Alternate translation: “what is happening is like what Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 15:21 u8d6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “Those whom no one had told the news about him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 15:22 f1fq Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul tells the believers in Rome about his personal plans to visit them and asks the believers to pray. 15:22 ex5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἐνεκοπτόμην 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “they also hindered me” or “people also hindered me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 15:23 b6kl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηκέτι τόπον ἔχων ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τούτοις 1 Paul implies that there are no more places in these areas where people live who have not heard about Christ. Alternate translation: “there are no more places in these regions where people have not heard about Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:24 si59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὴν Σπανίαν 1 At that time, **Spain** was a Roman province west of Rome that Paul desired to visit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 15:24 c6wq διαπορευόμενος 1 Alternate translation: “as I pass through Rome” or “while I am on my way” 15:24 vya3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ 1 Here Paul implies that he wants the Roman believers to provide some financial assistance to him for his journey to Spain. Alternate translation: “that you will provide for me on my journey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:24 rzie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ 1 You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “and that you will help me on my journey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 15:24 wg6d ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπλησθῶ 1 Alternate translation: “after I have enjoyed spending some time with you” 15:26 vn1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche εὐδόκησαν & Μακεδονία καὶ Ἀχαΐα 1 Here the words **Macedonia** and **Achaia** are synecdoches for the people who live in those areas. Alternate translation: “the believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Achaia were happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 15:27 w5ap εὐδόκησαν γάρ 1 Alternate translation: “Indeed, the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were pleased to do it” 15:27 tfz1 ὀφειλέται εἰσὶν αὐτῶν 1 Alternate translation: “indeed the people of Macedonia and Achaia are in debt to the believers in Jerusalem” 15:27 en7l εἰ & τοῖς πνευματικοῖς αὐτῶν ἐκοινώνησαν τὰ ἔθνη, ὀφείλουσιν καὶ ἐν τοῖς σαρκικοῖς λειτουργῆσαι αὐτοῖς 1 Alternate translation: “since the Gentiles have shared in the spiritual things of the Jerusalem believers, the Gentiles ought to share their physical things with the Jerusalem believers” 15:28 zz8u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σφραγισάμενος αὐτοῖς τὸν καρπὸν τοῦτον 1 Paul speaks of the money he is taking to Jerusalem as if it were a **fruit** that was collected and **sealed** for them. Alternate translation: “and have safely delivered this offering to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 15:29 ylq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ, ἐλεύσομαι 1 This phrase means that Christ will bless Paul and the Roman believers. Alternate translation: “Christ will abundantly bless us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:30 w1ta δὲ 1 If your language has a way to show that Paul has stopped talking about the good things he is confident of ([Romans 15:29](../15/29.md)) and is now starting to talk about the dangers he faces, use it here. 15:30 yb7m παρακαλῶ & ὑμᾶς 1 Alternate translation: “I encourage you” 15:30 v9iy ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women. 15:30 fy1v συναγωνίσασθαί 1 Alternate translation: “to work hard with” or “to struggle with” 15:31 u7st rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ῥυσθῶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀπειθούντων 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may rescue me from those who are disobedient” or “God may keep those who are disobedient from harming me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 15:31 nw5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ εὐπρόσδεκτος τοῖς ἁγίοις γένηται 1 Here Paul expresses his desire that the **saints** in **Jerusalem** will gladly accept the money from the believers in Macedonia and Achaia. Alternate translation: “and pray that the believers in Jerusalem will be glad to receive the money that I am bringing them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 15:33 s947 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης μετὰ 1 The **God of peace** means the God who causes believers to have inner peace. Alternate translation: “I pray that God who causes all of us to have inner peace may be with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 16:intro qy96 0 # Romans 16 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n8. Conclusion (15:14–16:27)\n * Paul describes his mission (15:14–21)\n * Paul’s travel plans (15:22–33)\n * Paul commends Phoebe (16:1–2)\n * Paul greets Christians in Rome (16:3–16)\n * Paul warns against false teachers (16:17–20)\n * Paul greets more Christians in Rome (16:21–24)\n * Doxology (16:25–27)\n\nIn this chapter, Paul gives personal greetings to some of the Christians in Rome. It was common to end a letter in the ancient Near East with this type of personal greeting.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\nBecause of the personal nature of this chapter, much of the context is unknown. This will make translation more difficult. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 16:1 sg6a Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul then greets many of the believers in Rome by name. 16:1 vkg8 συνίστημι δὲ ὑμῖν Φοίβην 1 Alternate translation: “I want you to respect Phoebe” 16:1 sry4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Φοίβην 1 **Phoebe** is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:1 q86q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἡμῶν 1 The word **our** refers to Paul and all believers. Alternate translation: “our sister in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 16:1 q669 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κενχρεαῖς 1 **Cenchrea** was a seaport city in Greece. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:2 cwx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αὐτὴν προσδέξησθε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Paul encourages the Roman believers to welcome Phoebe as a fellow believer. Alternate translation: “you would welcome her because we all belong to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 16:2 yic3 ἀξίως τῶν ἁγίων 1 Alternate translation: “in the way that believers should welcome other believers” 16:2 qp4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism παραστῆτε αὐτῇ 1 Paul encourages the Roman believers to give to Phoebe anything she needs. Alternate translation: “help her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 16:2 inh1 καὶ & προστάτις πολλῶν ἐγενήθη καὶ ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ 2 Alternate translation: “has helped many people, and she has also helped me” 16:3 c5lg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Πρίσκαν καὶ Ἀκύλαν 1 **Priscilla** was the wife of **Aquila**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:3 fsk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς συνεργούς μου ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul’s **fellow workers** are people who also tell others about Jesus. Alternate translation: “who work with me to tell people about Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 16:5 i32d καὶ τὴν κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῶν ἐκκλησίαν 1 Alternate translation: “and greet the believers who meet in their house to worship” 16:5 bn9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἐπαίνετον 1 **Epaenetus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:5 d1f1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπαρχὴ τῆς Ἀσίας εἰς Χριστόν 1 Paul speaks of Epaenetus as if he were a fruit that he harvested. Alternate translation: “first person in Asia to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 16:6 ew2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μαρίαν 1 **Mary** is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:7 tzk4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀνδρόνικον 1 **Andronicus** is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:7 z9uk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰουνίαν 1 This could refer to: (1) Junia, a woman’s name. (2) Junias, a man’s name, although this is less likely. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:7 gce3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἵτινές εἰσιν ἐπίσημοι ἐν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 16:8 h976 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀμπλιᾶτον 1 **Ampliatus** is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:8 alh2 τὸν ἀγαπητόν μου ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Alternate translation: “my dear friend and fellow believer in the Lord” 16:9 bd5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Οὐρβανὸν & Στάχυν 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:10 k55t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀπελλῆν & Ἀριστοβούλου 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:10 q96n τὸν δόκιμον ἐν Χριστῷ 1 The word **approved** refers to someone who has been tested and proved to be genuine. Alternate translation: “whom Christ has approved” 16:11 gt6r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἡρῳδίωνα & Ναρκίσσου 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:11 ket9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς ὄντας ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 This refers to those who trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who are believers” or “who belong to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 16:12 sq9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Τρύφαιναν & Τρυφῶσαν & Περσίδα 1 These are women’s names. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:13 zmf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ῥοῦφον 1 **Rufus** is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:13 zy3x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸν ἐκλεκτὸν ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord has chosen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 16:13 hqf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐμοῦ 1 Paul speaks of the mother of Rufus as if she were his own **mother**. Alternate translation: “his mother, whom I also think of as my mother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 16:14 dwh9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀσύγκριτον, Φλέγοντα, Ἑρμῆν, Πατροβᾶν, Ἑρμᾶν 1 These are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:14 ck2w ἀδελφούς 1 Here, **brothers** refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women. 16:15 ye9j rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Φιλόλογον & Νηρέα & Ὀλυμπᾶν 1 These are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:15 n2rx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰουλίαν 1 **Julia** is the name of a woman. She was probably the wife of Philologus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:16 g2z1 φιλήματι ἁγίῳ 1 an expression of affection for fellow believers 16:16 t1q4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς αἱ ἐκκλησίαι πᾶσαι τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks in a general manner concerning the **churches** of Christ. Alternate translation: “The believers in all the churches in this area send their greetings to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 16:17 u1m9 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul gives one last warning to the believers about unity and living for God. 16:17 wx6r ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** refers to fellow Christians, including both men and women. 16:17 ztv5 σκοπεῖν 1 Alternate translation: “to watch out for” 16:17 n59l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰς διχοστασίας καὶ τὰ σκάνδαλα & ποιοῦντας 1 This refers to those who argue and cause others to stop trusting in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who are causing believers to argue with one another and to stop having faith in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 16:17 j9x7 παρὰ τὴν διδαχὴν ἣν ὑμεῖς ἐμάθετε 1 Alternate translation: “and teaching things that do not agree with the truth you have already learned” 16:17 b318 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκκλίνετε ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 Here, **turn away** is a metaphor for “refuse to listen.” Alternate translation: “do not listen to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 16:18 ea6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ 1 The words “they serve” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “but they serve their own stomach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 16:18 nxn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ 1 Here, **stomach** is a metonym that refers to physical desires. Alternate translation: “but they only care about their physical desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 16:18 eff9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ 1 Serving there **stomach** represents satisfying their desires. Alternate translation: “but they only want to satisfy their own selfish desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 16:18 eif6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet καὶ διὰ τῆς χρηστολογίας καὶ εὐλογίας 1 The words **smooth** and **flattering** mean basically the same thing. Paul is emphasizing how these people are deceiving believers. Alternate translation: “and by saying things that seem to be good and true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 16:18 c2je rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐξαπατῶσι τὰς καρδίας τῶν ἀκάκων 1 Here, **hearts** is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “they deceive the innocent believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 16:18 m9h5 τῶν ἀκάκων 1 This refers to those who are simple, inexperienced, and naive. Alternate translation: “of those who innocently trust them” or “of those who do not know these teachers are fooling them” 16:19 imc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ γὰρ ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ, εἰς πάντας ἀφίκετο 1 Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers’ **obedience** as if it were a person who could go to people. Alternate translation: “For everyone has heard how you obey Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 16:19 le5l ἀκεραίους & εἰς τὸ κακόν 1 Alternate translation: “not involved in doing evil things” 16:20 s3cq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ δὲ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης συντρίψει τὸν Σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας ὑμῶν ἐν τάχει 1 The phrase **crush … under your feet** refers to complete victory over an enemy. Here Paul speaks of the victory over **Satan** as if the Roman believers were trampling an enemy under their **feet**. Alternate translation: “Soon God will give you peace and complete victory over Satan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 16:21 z4g3 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul gives greetings from the believers who are with him. 16:21 ku15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Λούκιος & Ἰάσων & Σωσίπατρος 1 These are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:22 xu3q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 **Tertius** is the man who wrote down what Paul spoke. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:22 nx4g ἀσπάζομαι ὑμᾶς & ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Alternate translation: “greet you as a fellow believer” 16:23 sw7r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Γάϊος & Ἔραστος & Κούαρτος 1 These are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 16:23 j9u7 ὁ ξένος 1 This refers to Gaius, the person in whose house Paul and his fellow believers gathered for worship. 16:23 m5hg ὁ οἰκονόμος 1 This is a person who takes care of the money for a group. 16:25 psm3 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul closes with a prayer of blessing. 16:25 v71l δὲ 1 Here the word **Now** marks the closing section of the letter. If you have a way of doing this in your language, you can use it here. 16:25 pp5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι 1 Paul speaks here of having strong faith as if a person were being set firmly in place. Alternate translation: “to make your faith strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 16:25 kmw1 κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, καὶ τὸ κήρυγμα Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “by the good news that I have preached about Jesus Christ” 16:25 s5ky rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου 1 Paul says that God has revealed previously hidden truths to the believers. He speaks of these truths as if they were a **secret**. Alternate translation: “because God has revealed to us believers what had been kept secret for a long time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 16:25 n6c1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “because God has revealed to us believers the secret that he was keeping for a long time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 16:26 d7r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος 1 The verbs **revealed** and **made known** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses both of them to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “but now the mystery has been made known to all the nations through the prophetic writings so people can believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 16:26 efyy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος 1 You can combine the verbs **revealed** and **made known** in an active form. Alternate translation: “but now the eternal God has made it known to all the nations through the prophetic writings so that people would believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 16:26 lc6d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως 1 Here, **obedience** and **faith** are abstract nouns. You can use the verbs “obey” and “trust” in your translation. Alternate translation: “so that all nations will believe and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 16:26 cvi3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως 1 You may need to make explicit who will obey and trust. Alternate translation: “so that all nations will obey God because they trust in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 16:27 qmj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μόνῳ σοφῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ᾧ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας. ἀμήν! 1 Here, **through Jesus Christ** refers to what Jesus did. To give **glory** means to praise God. Alternate translation: “Because of what Jesus Christ has done for us, we will praise forever the one who alone is God and who alone is wise. Amen!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])